colour television chassis em3e - reptips.dk em3e.pdf · gb 2 1. em3e technical specifications,...

Published by CO 0066 Service PaCE Printed in the Netherlands Subject to modification � 3122 785 11360

©Copyright 2001 Philips Consumer Electronics B.V. Eindhoven, The Netherlands.All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in aretrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,photocopying, or otherwise without the prior permission of Philips.

Colour television Chassis

EM3EAA

CL 16532044_000.eps150501

Contents Page Contents Page1 Technical Specifications, Connection Facilities 2

and Chassis Overview2 Safety Instructions, Maintenance, 4

Warnings and Notes3 Directions for Use 64 Mechanical Instructions 205 Service Modes, Error Codes, 23

Faultfinding and Repair Tips.6 Block Diagrams

Block Diagram (Supply, Deflection) 35Block Diagram (SSB Video) 36Block Diagram (SSB Audio) 37Supply Lines Overview 38Wiring Diagram 39I2C Overview 40Testpoint Overviews 41

7 Electrical Diagrams and PWB lay-outs Diagram PWBMain Supply (Diagram A1) 42 51-56Stand-by Supply (Diagram A2) 43 51-56Line Deflection (Diagram A3) 44 51-56Frame Deflection E/W Drive (Diagram A4) 45 51-56Rotation Circuitry (Diagram A5) 46 51-56Audio Amplifier (Diagram A6) 47 51-56Headphone Amplifier (Diagram A7) 46 51-56Tuner, I/O, SIMM (Female) (Diagram A8) 48 51-56Front (Diagram A10) 49 51-56Inputs / Outputs (Diagram A11) 50 51-56SIMM (Male) (Diagram B1) 57 64-73IF, I/O, Video Processing (Diagram B2) 58 64-73Featurebox (PICNIC) (Diagram B3) 59 64-73Video Control (HOP) (Diagram B4) 60 64-73Teletext & Control (OTC) (Diagram B5) 61 64-73Audio Demodulator (Diagram B6) 62 64-73Falconic (Diagram B8) 62 64-73

Mains Switch Panel (Diagram E) 74 74-75CRT Panel (Diagram F) 76 77DC-Shift Panel (Diagram G) 78 78I/O 3rd SCART Panel (Diagram H) 80 81VDAF + 2nd Order S Panel (Diagram I) 82 83Side I/O Panel (Diagram O) 84 85Top Control (Diagram P) 86 86

8 Electrical Alignments 879 Circuit Descriptions 94

List of Abbreviations 10910 Spare Parts List 111

Technical Specifications, Connection Facilities and Chassis OverviewGB 2 EM3E1.

1. Technical Specifications, Connection Facilities and ChassisOverview

1.1 Technical Specifications

1.1.1 Reception

Tuning system : PLLColour systems : PAL B/G, D/K, I

: SECAM B/G, D/K,L/L’

: NTSC 4.43(playback only)

Sound systems : FM-mono B/G: FM-mono D/K: FM-mono I: AM-mono L/L’: 2CS B/G: 2CS/Chez D/K: NICAM B/G: NICAM D/K: NICAM I: NICAM L

A/V connections : PAL B/G, D/K, I: SECAM B/G, D/K,

L/L’: NTSC 4.43

(playback only)Channel selections : 100 channels

: VHF, UHF, S-Channels andHyperband

Aerial input : 75 �, CoaxVCR preselections : 0 and 90 - 99

1.1.2 Miscellaneous

Mains voltage : 220 - 240 V (� 10 %)Mains frequency : 50 / 60 Hz (� 5 %)Ambient temperature : + 5 to + 45 deg. CMaximum humidity : 90 % R.H.Standby Power consumption : 1 W

1.2 Connection Facilities

1.2.1 Front Controls / Side Connections

Figure 1-1

Audio / Video In- - Video CVBS (1 Vpp / 75 �) ��

- - Audio L (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) ��

- - Audio R (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) ��

- - Headphone (32 - 2000 � / 10 mW) ��

SVHS (in)1 - GND �

2 - GND �

3 - Y (1 Vpp / 75 �) �

4 - C / 16:9 (0.3 Vpp / 75 �) �

5 - GND �

1.2.2 Rear Connections

Figure 1-2

Audio Out- - Audio Surr. (0.5 Vrms / 1 k�) ��

- - Audio L (0.5 Vrms / 1 k�) ��

- - Audio R (0.5 Vrms / 1 k�) ��

External 1 (in/out): RGB/YUV + CVBS

Figure 1-3

1 - Audio R (0.5 Vrms / 1 k�) �

2 - Audio R (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) �

3 - Audio L (0.5 Vrms / 1 k�) �

4 - GND �

5 - GND �

6 - Audio L (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) �

7 - Blue / U (0.7 Vpp / 75 �) �

8 - CVBS-status 0 - 1.3 V: INT4.5 - 7 V: EXT 16:99.5 - 12 V: EXT 4:3

9 - GND �

10-11- Green / Y (0.7 Vpp / 75 �) �

12-13- GND �

14- GND �

15- Red / V (0.7 Vpp / 75 �) �

16- RGB-status 0 - 0.4 V: INT 1 - 3 V: EXT / 75 �

17- GND �

18- GND �

19- CVBS (1 Vpp / 75 �) �

20- CVBS (1 Vpp / 75 �) �

21- Earth GND ��

CL16532044_001.eps260401

SVHSVIDEOAUDIO LAUDIO R

3.5

SK 1 IR-RECEIVER

FRONT CONTROL SIDE I/O

STANDBY LED

CL16532044_002.eps090501

AUDIO OUT

SURR.

L

R

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

SERVICECONNECTOR

1 21

202CL96532137_056.eps

171199

Technical Specifications, Connection Facilities and Chassis Overview GB 3EM3E 1.

External 2 (in/out): SVHS + CVBS (intended for VCR)

Figure 1-4

1 - Audio R (0.5 Vrms / 1 k�) �

2 - Audio R (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) �

3 - Audio L (0.5 Vrms / 1 k�) �

4 - GND �

5 - GND �

6 - Audio L (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) �

7 - C (0.7 Vpp / 75 �) �

8 - CVBS-status 0 - 1.3 V: INT4.5 - 7 V: EXT 16:99.5 - 12 V: EXT 4:3

9 - GND �

10- Easy link (P50)11-12-13- GND �

14- GND �

15- C (0.7 Vpp / 75 �) �

16-17- GND �

18- GND �

19- CVBS (1 Vpp / 75 �) �

20- Y / CVBS (1 Vpp / 75 �) �

21- GND �

External 3 (in): CVBS

Figure 1-5

1 -2 - Audio R (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) �

3 -4 - GND �

5 - GND �

6 - Audio L (0.5 Vrms / 10 k�) �

7 -8 - CVBS-status 0 - 1.3 V: INT

4.5 - 7 V: EXT 16:99.5 - 12 V: EXT 4:3

9 - GND �

10-11-12-13- GND �

14- GND �

15-16-17- GND �

18- GND �

19-20- CVBS (1 Vpp / 75 �) �

21-

1.3 Chassis Overview

Figure 1-6

1 21

202CL96532137_056.eps

171199

1 21

202CL96532137_056.eps

171199

CL 16532044_004.eps140501

TOP CONTROL PANEL

MAINSWITCH PANEL

LARGE SIGNAL PANEL

SMALL SIGNAL BOARD

SIDE I/O PANEL

CRT/SCAVEM PANELF

O

3rd SCARTH

B

P

E

P

A

DAF PANEL I

Safety & Maintenance instructions, Warnings and NotesGB 4 EM3E2.

2. Safety & Maintenance instructions, Warnings and Notes

2.1 Safety instructions for repairs

Safety regulations require that during a repair:• Due to the chassis concept, a very large part of this

chassis (incl. deflection) is 'hot'. Therefore the set mustbe connected to the mains via an isolating transformer.

• Safety components, indicated by the symbol�, shouldbe replaced by components identical to the original ones.

• When replacing the CRT, safety goggles must be worn.

Safety regulations require that after a repair, the set must bereturned in its original condition. In particular attention shouldbe paid to the following points:• General repair instruction: as a strict precaution, we

advise you to resolder the solder joints, through whichthe horizontal deflection current is flowing, in particular:– All pins of the line output transformer (LOT);– Fly-back capacitor(s);– S-correction capacitor(s);– Line output transistor;– Pins of the connector with wires to the deflection coil;– Other components through which the deflection

current flows.Note: This resoldering is advised to prevent bad connectionsdue to metal fatigue in solder joints and is therefore onlynecessary for television sets older than 2 years.• The wire trees and EHT cable should be routed correctly

and fixed with the mounted cable clamps.• The insulation of the mains lead should be checked for

external damage.• The mains lead strain relief should be checked for its

function in order to avoid touching the CRT, hotcomponents or heat sinks.

• The electrical DC resistance between the mains plug andthe secondary side should be checked (only for setswhich have a mains isolated power supply). This checkcan be done as follows:– Unplug the mains cord and connect a wire between

the two pins of the mains plug;– Set the mains switch to the 'ON' position (keep the

mains cord unplugged!);– Measure the resistance value between the pins of

the mains plug and the metal shielding of the tuner orthe aerial connection on the set. The reading shouldbe between 4.5 M� and 12 M�.

– Switch off the TV and remove the wire between thetwo pins of the mains plug.

• The cabinet should be checked for defects to avoidtouching of any inner parts by the customer.

2.2 Maintenance instructions

It is recommended to have a maintenance inspection carriedout by a qualified service employee. The interval depends onthe usage conditions:• When the set is used under normal circumstances, for

example in a living room, the recommended interval is 3to 5 years.

• When the set is used in circumstances with higher dust,grease or moisture levels, for example in a kitchen, therecommended interval is 1 year.

• The maintenance inspection contains the followingactions:– Execute the above-mentioned 'general repair

instruction'.– Clean the power supply and deflection circuitry on

the chassis.– Clean the picture tube panel and the neck of the

picture tube.

2.3 Warnings

• In order to prevent damage to IC's and transistors, allhigh-voltage flashovers must be avoided. In order toprevent damage to the picture tube, the method shown inFig. 2-1 should be used to discharge the picture tube.Use a high-voltage probe and a multimeter (positionVDC). Discharge until the meter reading is 0 V (afterapprox. 30 s).

Figure 2-1

• All IC's and many other semiconductors aresusceptible to electrostatic discharges (ESD). Carelesshandling during repair can reduce life drastically. Whenrepairing, make sure that you are connected with thesame potential as the mass of the set by a wristband withresistance. Keep components and tools also at this samepotential.

• Together with the deflection unit and any multipole unit,the used flat square picture tubes form an integrated unit.The deflection and the multipole units are set optimally atthe factory. Adjustment of this unit during repair istherefore not recommended.

• Be careful during measurements in the high-voltagesection and on the picture tube.

• Never replace modules or other components while theunit is switched ON.

• When making settings, use plastic rather than metaltools. This will prevent any short circuits and the dangerof a circuit becoming unstable.

• Wear safety goggles during replacement of the picturetube.

V

CL96532156_040.eps140501

Safety & Maintenance instructions, Warnings and Notes GB 5EM3E 2.

2.4 Notes

• The direct voltages and oscillograms should bemeasured with regard to the tuner earth (�) or hot earth().

• The direct voltages and oscillograms shown in thediagrams are indicative and should be measured in theService Default Mode (see chapter 5) with a colour barsignal and stereo sound (L: 3 kHz, R: 1 kHz unless statedotherwise) and picture carrier at 475.25 MHz.

• Where necessary, the oscillograms and direct voltagesare measured with (�) and without (�) aerial signal.Voltages in the power supply section are measured bothfor normal operation ( ) and in Standby (�). Thesevalues are indicated by means of the appropriatesymbols.

• The picture tube PWB has printed spark gaps. Eachspark gap is connected between an electrode of thepicture tube and the Aquadag coating.

• The semiconductors indicated in the circuit diagram andin the parts lists are completely interchangeable perposition with the semiconductors in the unit, irrespectiveof the type indication on these semiconductors.

• Manufactured under license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation. DOLBY, the double D symbol andPRO LOGIC are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Directions for useGB 6 EM3E3.

3. Directions for use

&P

lace

th

e T

V o

n a

so

lid s

urf

ace.

For

vent

ilatio

n,le

ave

at le

ast

5 cm

free

all

arou

nd t

he T

V.D

o no

t pl

ace

the

TV

on

a ca

rpet

.To

pre

vent

any

uns

afe

situ

atio

ns,d

o no

t pl

ace

any

obje

cts

on t

op o

f the

TV.

Avo

id h

eat,

dire

ct s

unlig

ht a

nd e

xpos

ure

to r

ain

or w

ater

.

éIn

sert

th

e ae

rial

plu

gfir

mly

into

the

aer

ial s

ocke

t x

at t

he b

ack

of t

heT

V.

“In

sert

the

mai

ns p

lug

in t

he w

all s

ocke

t ha

ving

a m

ains

vol

tage

of 2

20V-

240V

.To

pre

vent

dam

agin

g th

e m

ains

(A

C)

cord

whi

ch c

ould

cau

se a

fire

or

elec

tric

shoc

k,do

not

pla

ce t

he T

V o

n th

e co

rd.

‘R

emot

e co

ntro

l:R

emov

e th

e co

ver

of t

he b

atte

ry c

ompa

rtm

ent.

Inse

rt t

he 2

bat

teri

es s

uppl

ied

(Typ

e R

6-1.

5V).

The

batt

erie

s su

pplie

d do

not

con

tain

the

hea

vy m

etal

s m

ercu

ry a

nd c

adm

ium

.N

ever

thel

ess

in m

any

coun

trie

s ex

haus

ted

batt

erie

s m

ay n

ot b

e di

spos

ed o

f w

ithyo

ur h

ouse

hold

was

te.P

leas

e ch

eck

on h

ow t

o di

spos

e of

exh

aust

ed b

atte

ries

acco

rdin

g to

loca

l reg

ulat

ions

.

Not

e:th

is re

mot

e co

ntro

l fun

ctio

ns w

ith T

Vs w

hich

use

the

RC6

sig

nallin

g st

anda

rd.

(S

wit

ch t

he

TV

on

:Pr

ess

the

pow

er s

witc

h A

on t

he fr

ont

of y

our

TV.

A g

reen

indi

cato

r on

the

fron

t of

the

TV

ligh

ts u

p an

d th

e sc

reen

com

es o

n.If

the

TV

is in

sta

ndby

mod

e (s

ee p

.9),

pres

s th

e - P

+ke

y on

the

rem

ote

cont

rol.

The

red

lam

p bl

inks

eve

ry t

ime

you

pres

s a

key

on t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l.W

hen

you

switc

h on

you

r se

t fo

r th

e fir

st t

ime,

the

men

u L

AN

GU

AG

Eau

tom

atic

ally

app

ears

on

the

scre

en.T

he e

xpla

natio

n ap

pear

s in

diff

eren

t la

ngua

ges

one

at a

tim

e.Ch

oose

you

r ow

n la

ngua

ge a

nd p

ress

the

OK

key

on t

he r

emot

eco

ntro

l.

Go

on t

o pa

ge 4

,Sto

re T

V c

hann

els.

3P

rep

arat

ion

Pre

par

atio

n

CA

BL

E

R6

/ 1,5

V

1mmin

.

2P

rep

arat

ion

Pre

par

atio

n

You

r re

mo

te c

on

tro

l

yÚ

yÚ

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

M

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

¬V

P

aw

h

qb

i0

SX

fh

U

hU

æ

MEN

U

INST

AN

TQ b

OK

◊

MO

DE

VC

R

Inst

alla

tio

n

p.4

DV

D/S

atel

lite

sele

ctio

n p

.25

Vid

eore

cord

er s

elec

tion

p.2

4

NEX

TV

IEW

/TX

T g

uide

on/

off æ p.

15

mai

n m

enu

on/o

ff M

EN

U

p.11

Per

iph

eral

sp.

24w

sele

ctio

n of

EX

T1,

EX

T2,

EX

T3

or F

RO

NT

volu

me

up/d

own

p.9

Vso

und

mut

e p.

9 ¬

prog

ram

me

sele

ctio

n p.

9P

Qsu

rrou

nd m

odes

p.

9

smar

t so

und

p.1

0M

smar

t pi

ctur

e p

.10

a

Bsw

itch

to s

tand

by

p.9

Eas

yLin

kp.

25®

INS

TA

NT

reco

rdin

g

Tele

text

p.

19-2

0

bte

lete

xt o

n/of

fC

time

disp

lay

subp

age

sele

ctio

n

fso

lutio

n to

puz

zles

hen

larg

e

hZ

oo

m

p.9

Cur

sor

to s

elec

t yo

ur c

hoic

e p

.4

OK

activ

ate

your

cho

ice

Co

lou

r ke

ys-

NEX

TV

IEW

sele

ctio

n p

.15

- di

rect

tel

etex

t pa

ge o

rsu

bjec

t se

lect

ion,

p.19

Au

dio

/vid

eo e

qu

ipm

ent

p.24

-25

ion

scr

een

info

p.

9

0pr

evio

us p

rogr

amm

e p

.9

◊vi

deo

reco

rder

func

tion

Xbi

lingu

al c

hoic

e /

soun

d in

fo

p.10

TX

T la

ngua

ge g

roup

sel

ectio

n p.

19

Sfr

eeze

the

pic

ture

p.

10ho

ld t

elet

ext

page

p.

20

bdu

al s

cree

n p

.14

qpi

ctur

e fo

rmat

,p.

10

hac

tive

cont

rol o

n/of

f p.

10

Directions for use GB 7EM3E 3.

Sear

chin

g fo

r an

d st

orin

g T

V c

hann

els

is d

one

chan

nel b

y ch

anne

l.Yo

u m

ust

go t

hrou

gh e

very

ste

p of

the

Man

ual i

nsta

llatio

n m

enu.

Sel

ecti

on

mo

de

is o

nly

pres

ent

and

light

s up

if t

he c

ount

ry s

elec

ted

also

offe

rs t

he c

hann

el o

ptio

n (C

-cha

nnel

s fo

r ae

rial

cha

nnel

s,S-

chan

nels

for

cabl

ech

anne

ls).

You

can

choo

se e

ither

cha

nnel

or

freq

uenc

y m

ode.

&Se

lect

the

TV

sys

tem

Sele

ct t

he c

ount

ry o

r pa

rt o

f the

wor

ld fr

om w

here

you

wan

t to

rec

eive

the

TV

cha

nnel

.If

you

are

conn

ecte

d to

a c

able

sys

tem

,sel

ect

your

cou

ntry

or

part

of t

hew

orld

whe

re y

ou a

re n

ow lo

cate

d.

éPr

ess

the

curs

or d

own

and

ente

r th

e pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

r w

ith t

he d

igit

keys

.

“Se

arch

for

a T

V c

hann

elPr

ess

the

curs

or le

ft/r

ight

.T

he fr

eque

ncy

or t

he c

hann

el n

umbe

r in

crea

ses

until

a T

Vch

anne

l is

foun

d.

Dir

ect

sele

ctio

n o

f a

TV

ch

ann

elIf

you

know

the

freq

uenc

y,th

e C

- or

S-c

hann

el n

umbe

r,en

ter

it di

rect

ly w

ithth

e di

git

keys

0 t

o 9.

Ask

for

a lis

t fr

om y

our

cabl

e co

mpa

ny o

r de

aler

,alte

rnat

ivel

y co

nsul

t th

eTa

ble

of fr

eque

ncie

s on

the

insi

de b

ackc

over

of t

his

hand

book

.

‘Fi

ne t

une

In c

ase

of p

oor

rece

ptio

n,yo

u ca

n im

prov

e th

e re

cept

ion

by a

djus

ting

the

freq

uenc

y w

ith t

he c

urso

r le

ft/r

ight

.

(To

sto

re y

our

TV

cha

nnel

,sel

ect

Sto

rean

d pr

ess

the

OK

key.

Rep

eat

step

s &

to (

to s

tore

ano

ther

TV

cha

nnel

.

§To

exi

t fr

om t

he m

enu

pres

s th

e M

EN

Uke

y on

the

rem

ote

cont

rol.

In t

he A

utom

atic

inst

alla

tion

men

u se

lect

Sta

rtan

d pr

ess

the

OK

key

toac

tivat

e th

e se

arch

ing.

All

TV

cha

nnel

s ar

e se

arch

ed fo

r an

d st

ored

auto

mat

ical

ly.

If a

cabl

e sy

stem

whi

ch b

road

cast

s A

CI (

Aut

omat

ic C

hann

el In

stal

latio

n) o

r a

TV

cha

nnel

tra

nsm

ittin

g a

tele

text

pag

e w

ith t

he fr

eque

ncie

s an

d pr

ogra

mm

ena

mes

of a

ll th

e T

V c

hann

els

whi

ch c

an b

e re

ceiv

ed,i

s de

tect

ed,t

he s

earc

h is

stop

ped

and

a pr

ogra

mm

e lis

t ap

pear

s.T

he p

rogr

amm

e lis

t is

aut

omat

ical

ly fi

lled

with

all

the

prog

ram

me

num

bers

and

nam

es o

f the

TV

cha

nnel

s tr

ansm

itted

.

It is

poss

ible

tha

t th

e ca

ble

com

pany

or

the

TV c

hann

el d

ispla

ys a

bro

adca

stse

lect

ion

men

u.La

yout

and

item

s ar

e de

fined

by

the

cabl

e co

mpa

ny o

r th

e TV

cha

nnel

.M

ake

your

cho

ice

with

the

cur

sor

and

pres

s th

e O

Kke

y.

To e

xit

from

the

men

u pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

on t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l.

Go

on t

o pa

ge 6

.

5In

stal

lati

on

Man

ual

inst

alla

tio

n

Au

tom

atic

inst

alla

tio

n

Automatic installation

Start

Stop

TV is searching

One moment please ...

JStop

K


Start

Stop 1 BBC1

2 BBC2

3 CNN

....

....

JStart

K

Manual installation

(Selection mode)

System

Programme no.

Search

Fine tune

Store

JSystem

K

4In

stal

lati

on

Sto

re T

V c

han

nel

s

Firs

t,se

lect

you

r la

ngua

ge a

nd c

ount

ry.

&Se

lect

Men

u l

angu

age

and

pres

s th

e O

Kke

y.

éSe

lect

you

r la

ngua

ge a

nd p

ress

the

OK

key.

Use

the

cur

sor

up/d

own

to s

crol

l thr

ough

the

list

and

to

brin

g up

oth

erla

ngua

ges

whi

ch a

re n

ot d

ispl

ayed

on

the

scre

en a

t pr

esen

t.

“Se

lect

Co

un

try

and

pres

s th

e O

Kke

y.

‘Se

lect

the

cou

ntry

whe

re y

ou a

re n

ow lo

cate

d an

d pr

ess

the

OK

key.

Use

the

cur

sor

up/d

own

to s

crol

l thr

ough

the

list

and

bri

ng u

p ot

her

coun

trie

s w

hich

are

not

dis

play

ed o

n th

e sc

reen

at

pres

ent.

Sele

ct O

ther

whe

n no

ne o

f the

cou

ntri

es a

pplie

s.

You

can

now

sea

rch

for

and

stor

e th

e T

V c

hann

els

in t

wo

diffe

rent

way

s:us

ing

auto

mat

ic i

nst

alla

tio

nor

man

ual

in

stal

lati

on

(tun

ing-

in c

hann

el b

ych

anne

l).Se

lect

you

r ch

oice

and

pre

ss t

he O

Kke

y.

Sel

ect

the

men

u la

ngu

age

and

co

un

try

MENU

TITLE

Menu language

JINSTALLATION

MENU

TITLE

United Kingdom

....

....

JCountry

MENU

TITLE

English

....

....

JMenu language

Pres

s U

and

hat

the

sam

e tim

e.

Inst

alla

tio

n

Sel

ect

the

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

men

u

&U

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n,le

ft/r

ight

dir

ectio

ns t

o se

lect

a m

enu

item

.

éPr

ess

the

OK

key

to a

ctiv

ate.

“U

se t

he M

EN

Uke

y to

ret

urn

or t

o sw

itch

the

men

u of

f.

To u

se t

he

men

us

B

®Ò

‡π

†

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

INST

AN

TQ

yÚ

VP

21

3

54

6

87

9B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

yÚ

sele

ct m

enu

item

retu

rn o

r sw

itch

mai

n m

enu

off

activ

ate

MENU

TITLE

Subject 1

Subject 2

Subject 3

JSubject 4

Subject 5

Subject 6

JSubject 4

L

M

Afte

r th

e ne

w o

r ex

tra T

V ch

anne

ls ha

ve b

een

stor

ed,t

he T

V au

tom

atic

ally

trans

fers

thos

e TV

cha

nnel

s to

the

vid

eo r

ecor

der

if it

is eq

uipp

ed w

ith t

he E

asyL

ink

func

tion.

The

mes

sage

Eas

yLin

k :d

ownl

oadi

ng .

.....

appe

ars

on t

he s

cree

n.Th

epr

ogra

mm

e lis

t of

the

vid

eo r

ecor

der

is no

w t

he s

ame

as t

he o

ne o

f th

e TV

.If

the

TV is

con

nect

ed t

o a

video

rec

orde

r w

hich

sup

port

s th

e N

EXTV

IEW

Link

fun

ctio

n,th

e TV

also

aut

omat

ical

ly tra

nsfe

rs t

he la

ngua

ge a

nd c

ount

ry s

elec

tions

to

the

video

reco

rder

.


7In

stal

lati

on

The

Set

up m

enu

allo

ws

you

to a

djus

t in

itial

set

tings

,i.e

.tho

se w

hich

are

not

rela

ted

to t

he in

stal

latio

n of

the

TV

cha

nnel

s.T

he S

etup

men

u co

ntai

ns it

ems

that

con

trol

the

set

tings

of t

he T

V’s

func

tions

,fe

atur

es,s

ervi

ces

and

peri

pher

als

you

may

hav

e co

nnec

ted.

&U

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n,le

ft/r

ight

dir

ectio

ns t

o se

lect

the

men

u ite

m.

éU

se t

he O

Kke

y to

act

ivat

e.

“U

se t

he M

EN

Uke

y to

ret

urn

or s

witc

h m

enu

off.

Dig

ital

so

urc

es

(for

futu

re u

se)

Def

ine

Dec

od

er/D

escr

ambl

er p

rogr

amm

e nu

mb

ers

If a

deco

der

or a

des

cram

bler

is c

onne

cted

,see

p.2

2 yo

u ca

n de

fine

one

orm

ore

prog

ram

me

num

bers

as

deco

der

prog

ram

me

num

bers

.

Pres

s th

e cu

rsor

left

/rig

ht t

o se

lect

the

inpu

t us

ed t

o co

nnec

t to

you

rde

code

r O

ff,E

XT

1or

EX

T2.

Sele

ct O

ffif

you

do n

ot w

ant

the

sele

cted

pro

gram

me

num

ber

bein

gac

tivat

ed a

s a

deco

der

prog

ram

me

num

ber.

Sele

ct E

XT

2w

hen

the

deco

der

is co

nnec

ted

to y

our

Easy

Link

vid

eo r

ecor

der.

Whe

n se

lect

ing

the

deco

der,

the

mes

sage

Eas

yLin

k:do

wnl

oadi

ng p

rese

ts...

.ap

pear

s on

the

scr

een.

Pic

ture

tilt

Se

lect

Pic

ture

tilt

with

the

cur

sor

up/d

own.

Kee

p th

e cu

rsor

left

/rig

ht p

ress

ed t

o ad

just

the

rot

atio

n of

the

pic

ture

.

Info

rmat

ion

lin

eSe

lect

On

and

afte

r th

e se

lect

ion

of a

TV

pro

gram

me

or a

fter

pre

ssin

g th

ei

key

on t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l,a

TV

cha

nnel

whi

ch b

road

cast

s te

lete

xt m

aytr

ansm

it th

e na

me

of t

he T

V c

hann

el,t

he p

rogr

amm

e na

me

or a

noth

erm

essa

ge.T

his

is d

ispl

ayed

on

scre

en n

ext

to in

form

atio

n ab

out

soun

d an

dpi

ctur

e fo

rmat

.W

hen

sele

cted

Off,o

nly

soun

d an

d pi

ctur

e fo

rmat

info

rmat

ion

is d

ispl

ayed

afte

r th

e se

lect

ion

of a

TV

cha

nnel

or

afte

r pr

essi

ng t

he i

key.

Fac

tory

set

tin

gsSe

lect

Fac

tory

set

tin

gsan

d pr

ess

the

OK

key

to r

esto

re p

ictu

re a

nd s

ound

sett

ings

,pre

defin

ed in

the

fact

ory.

Au

to f

orm

atSe

lect

ing

Yes

caus

es t

he s

cree

n to

aut

omat

ical

ly fi

ll as

muc

h of

the

pic

ture

as

poss

ible

whe

n T

V p

rogr

amm

es a

re n

ot c

arry

ing

spec

ial s

igna

ls d

etec

ting

the

corr

ect

scre

en fo

rmat

.W

ith t

he q

key

on t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l you

can

stil

l sel

ect

othe

r pi

ctur

efo

rmat

s.Se

e p.

10.

Inst

all T

V S

etu

pINSTALLATION

Menu language

Country


Manual installation

Give name

Reshuffle

Favourite programmes

SETUP

JSETUP

Decoder/Descrambler

Programme

Decoder status

JProgramme

SETUP

Digital Sources

Decoder/Descrambler

Picture tilt

Information line

Factory settings

Auto format

yes/no

Auto Surround

INSTALLATION

JDecoder/Descrambler

6In

stal

lati

on

Giv

e n

ame

It is

pos

sibl

e to

cha

nge

the

nam

e st

ored

in t

he m

emor

y or

to

assi

gn a

nam

eto

a T

V c

hann

el w

hich

has

not

yet

bee

n en

tere

d.A

nam

e w

ith u

p to

5 le

tter

sor

num

bers

can

be

give

n to

the

pro

gram

me

num

bers

0 t

o 99

.For

exa

mpl

eSU

PER

,BBC

1,...

Betw

een

99 a

nd 0

you

can

als

o na

me

any

peri

pher

als

that

are

conn

ecte

d to

a e

uroc

onne

ctor

.

&Se

lect

Giv

e n

ame

in t

he I

NS

TA

LL

AT

ION

men

u an

d pr

ess

the

OK

key.

éSe

lect

the

pro

gram

me

num

ber.

“Pr

ess

the

OK

key.

‘Se

lect

the

cha

ract

er w

ith t

he c

urso

r up

/dow

n.

(Se

lect

the

follo

win

g po

sitio

n w

ith t

he c

urso

r ri

ght.

§Se

lect

the

follo

win

g ch

arac

ter.

èPr

ess

the

OK

key

whe

n fin

ishe

d.

!Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to r

etur

n to

the

IN

ST

AL

LA

TIO

Nm

enu.

Spac

e,nu

mbe

rs a

nd o

ther

spe

cial

cha

ract

ers

are

loca

ted

betw

een

Z a

nd A

.

Acc

ordi

ng t

o yo

ur p

refe

renc

e yo

u ca

n c

hang

e th

e or

der

of t

he s

tore

d T

Vch

anne

ls.

&Se

lect

Res

hu

ffle

in t

he I

NS

TA

LL

AT

ION

men

u an

d pr

ess

the

OK

key.

éSe

lect

the

pro

gram

me

num

ber

you

wan

t to

exc

hang

e.

“Pr

ess

the

OK

key.

‘Se

lect

the

new

num

ber

you

wan

t to

exc

hang

e it

with

.

(Pr

ess

the

OK

key.

Rep

eat

the

oper

atio

n un

til a

ll T

V c

hann

els

are

allo

cate

d as

you

like

.

§Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to r

etur

n to

the

IN

ST

AL

LA

TIO

Nm

enu.

Res

hu

ffle

th

e p

rogr

amm

e lis

t

Aft

er le

avin

g th

e in

stal

latio

n yo

u ca

n br

owse

thr

ough

the

TV

cha

nnel

s by

pres

sing

the

- P

+ke

y.O

nly

thos

e T

V c

hann

els

whi

ch a

re in

the

favo

urite

list

will

be

disp

laye

d.N

on-f

avou

rite

TV

cha

nnel

s ca

n st

ill b

e se

lect

ed w

ith t

he d

igit

keys

.By

defa

ult

all s

tore

d ch

anne

ls a

re a

dded

to

the

favo

urite

list

.

&Se

lect

Fav

ou

rite

pro

gram

mes

in t

he I

NS

TA

LL

AT

ION

men

u an

d pr

ess

the

OK

key.

éSe

lect

you

r fa

vour

ite p

rogr

amm

e nu

mbe

r.

“Se

lect

Yes

or N

ow

ith t

he c

urso

r le

ft/r

ight

.

‘R

epea

t fo

r ev

ery

TV

cha

nnel

you

wan

t to

mak

e a

favo

urite

or

ano

n-fa

vour

ite T

V c

hann

el.

(Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to r

etur

n to

the

IN

ST

AL

LA

TIO

Nm

enu.

In o

rder

for

NEX

TVIE

Wto

fun

ctio

n pr

oper

ly,th

e fir

st T

V ch

anne

l fro

m t

he fa

vour

ite li

stsh

ould

also

bro

adca

st t

he c

orre

ct lo

cal d

ate

and

time

via t

elet

ext.

Sel

ect

Fav

ou

rite

TV

ch

ann

els

INSTALLATION

Menu language

Country


Manual installation

Give name

Reshuffle


SETUP

JGive name

Give name

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

FRONT

0 1 BBC1

2 BBC2

3 ....

4 ....

5 ....

J0

Reshuffle

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

FRONT

0

1 CNN

2 BBC2

3 ....

4 ....

5 ....

J1 CNN


0 ...

No1 ...

Yes

2 ...

No3 ....

No4 ....

Yes

5 ....

J2 ...

Yes


9U

se o

f th

e re

mo

te c

on

tro

l

Op

erat

ion

Use

of

the

rem

ote

co

ntr

ol

yÚ

VP

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

BS

tan

dby

The

set

is s

witc

hed

off.T

o sw

itch

the

TV

on

agai

n,pr

ess

- P

+or

the

dig

it ke

ys.

If yo

ur E

asyL

ink

vide

o re

cord

er h

as t

hesy

stem

sta

ndby

func

tion

and

you

pres

s th

est

andb

y ke

y fo

r 3

seco

nds,

both

the

TV

and

vide

o re

cord

er a

re s

witc

hed

to s

tand

by.

Your

TV

cons

umes

ene

rgy

in t

he s

tand

by m

ode.

Ener

gy c

onsu

mpt

ion

cont

ribut

es t

o ai

r an

d w

ater

pollu

tion.

We

advis

e to

sw

itch

off

your

TV

over

nigh

t in

stea

d of

leav

ing

it on

sta

ndby

.You

save

ene

rgy.

®Ò

‡π

†V

ideo

rec

ord

er s

ee p

.24

®In

stan

tre

cord

If yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r ha

s th

e Ea

syLi

nkfu

nctio

n th

e IN

ST

AN

T®

key

for

reco

rd c

anbe

ope

rate

d in

the

TV

mod

e.

æN

EX

TV

IEW

/TX

T g

uid

e on

/off

se

e p.

15

ME

NU

Mai

n m

enu

o

n/of

f se

e p.

11

OK

Pres

s th

is k

ey t

o ac

tivat

e yo

ur c

hoic

e,w

hen

in t

he m

enus

.Q

Su

rro

un

d m

od

es

Incr

edib

le S

urr

ou

nd

With

ste

reo

tran

smis

sion

,and

whe

nIn

cred

ible

Su

rro

un

d is

sel

ecte

d,it

seem

s as

thou

gh t

he lo

udsp

eake

rs a

re s

prea

d fu

rthe

rap

art

from

one

ano

ther

.

Vir

tual

Do

lby

Su

rro

un

d

(opt

imal

with

Dol

by S

urro

und

signa

ls)V

irtu

al D

olby

Su

rrou

nd e

nabl

es y

ou t

oex

peri

ence

the

effe

ct o

f Dol

by S

urro

und

Pro

Logi

c,re

prod

ucin

g a

rear

sou

nd e

ffect

.Se

e So

und

men

u,V

irtu

al D

olby

effe

ct,p

.12.

iS

cree

n i

nfo

rmat

ion

Pres

s fo

r 5

seco

nds

to a

ctiv

ate/

de-a

ctiv

ate

the

exte

nded

or

redu

ced

disp

lay

of T

Vch

anne

l and

pro

gram

me

info

rmat

ion

on t

hesc

reen

.

Pres

s br

iefly

to

disp

lay

info

rmat

ion

abou

t th

ese

lect

ed T

V c

hann

el a

nd p

rogr

amm

e,th

eso

und

rece

ptio

n,pi

ctur

e se

ttin

gs a

nd t

here

mai

ning

tim

e se

t w

ith t

he s

leep

timer

.

0/9

Dig

it k

eys

To s

elec

t a

TV

cha

nnel

.Fo

r a

two

digi

t pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

r,en

ter

the

seco

nd d

igit

with

in 2

seco

nds.

To s

witc

h im

med

iate

ly t

o a

sele

cted

one

dig

it T

V c

hann

el,k

eep

the

digi

tke

y pr

esse

d a

bit

long

er.

0P

revi

ou

s p

rogr

amm

eT

he p

revi

ousl

y se

lect

ed T

V c

hann

el is

dis

play

ed.

The

◊in

dica

tion

is o

nly

vide

o re

cord

er.

Use

of

the

rem

ote

co

ntr

ol

bTe

lete

xt

on/

off

see

p.19

fh

T

elet

ext

fun

ctio

ns

se

e p.

20

hZ

oo

mPr

ess

the

ZO

OM

hke

y re

peat

edly

to

sele

cton

e of

the

zoo

m m

agni

ficat

ions

(x1

,x4,

x9,

x16)

.Add

ition

ally

you

can

shi

ft t

he s

elec

ted

zoom

win

dow

ove

r th

e sc

reen

with

the

curs

or.

Pres

s i

to a

ctiv

ate/

de-a

ctiv

ate

the

cont

inuo

us d

ispl

ay o

f the

zoo

m m

agni

ficat

ion.

The

zoo

m w

indo

w is

res

et a

fter

:sel

ectin

gan

othe

r T

V c

hann

el,a

noth

er p

ictu

re fo

rmat

or w

hen

anot

her

pict

ure

form

at is

sel

ecte

dau

tom

atic

ally

.Z

oom

ing

is di

sabl

ed in

Dua

l scr

een

mod

e.

UT

ime

dis

pla

yT

he t

ime,

dow

nloa

ded

from

the

TV

cha

nnel

(with

tel

etex

t) s

tore

d on

pro

gram

me

num

ber

1 or

the

low

est

favo

urite

pro

gram

me

num

ber,

is d

ispl

ayed

on

the

scre

en.

This

func

tion

is no

t av

aila

ble

whe

n co

ntin

uous

subt

itles

hav

e be

en s

witc

hed

on.

VV

olu

me

Pres

s +

or

- to

adj

ust

the

volu

me.

¬

Mu

te

Tem

pora

rily

inte

rrup

t th

e so

und

or r

esto

re it.

PP

rogr

amm

e se

lect

ion

To b

row

se t

hrou

gh t

he T

V c

hann

els

activ

ated

in t

heFa

vour

ite P

rogr

amm

e m

enu.

8In

stal

lati

on

Au

to S

urr

ou

nd

Som

etim

es t

he b

road

cast

er t

rans

mits

spe

cial

sig

nals

for

Surr

ound

Sou

nden

code

d pr

ogra

mm

es.I

n th

at c

ase,

the

TV

aut

omat

ical

ly s

witc

hes

to t

hebe

st S

urro

und

Soun

d m

ode

whe

n A

uto

Surr

ound

is s

witc

hed

on.

Vir

tual

Dol

by*

Surr

ound

will

be

repr

oduc

ed,s

ee p

.9.

Ove

rrul

ing

this

sur

roun

d m

ode

rem

ains

pos

sibl

e.

Inst

alla

tio

nSe

lect

In

stal

lati

on

and

pres

s th

e O

Kke

y to

ret

urn

imm

edia

tely

to

the

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

men

u.

‘To

exi

t fr

om t

he m

enu

pres

s th

e M

EN

Uke

y re

peat

edly

.

SETUP

Digital Sources

Decoder/Descrambler

Picture tilt

Information line

Factory settings

Auto format

yes/no

Auto Surround

INSTALLATION

JAuto Surround

‘Dol

by’ ‘

Pro

Logi

c’ a

nd t

he d

oubl

e-D

sym

bol

are

trad

emar

ks o

f Dol

by L

abor

ator

ies

Lice

nsin

g C

orpo

ratio

n.M

anuf

actu

red

unde

r lic

ense

from

Dol

by L

abor

ator

ies

Lice

nsin

g C

orpo

ratio

n.


11U

se o

f th

e m

enu

s

&Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to d

ispl

ay/c

ance

l the

MA

IN M

EN

U.

éU

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n di

rect

ions

to

sele

ct t

he P

ICT

UR

E,S

OU

ND

orF

EA

TU

RE

Sm

enu

or t

o se

lect

the

PR

OG

RA

MM

ES.

“Pr

ess

the

curs

or r

ight

to

activ

ate

the

sele

cted

men

u.

‘U

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n,le

ft/r

ight

dir

ectio

ns t

o se

lect

the

men

u ite

m.

(U

se t

he O

Kke

y to

act

ivat

e.

§Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

repe

ated

ly t

o re

turn

or

to s

witc

h th

e m

enu

off.

Pic

ture

men

u

If an

NTS

C pe

riphe

ral i

s co

nnec

ted

to o

ne o

f th

e eu

roco

nnec

tors

,the

opt

ion

Hue

also

app

ears

.

Tin

tSe

lect

the

col

our

tem

pera

ture

:No

rmal

,War

mor

Co

ol.

Dig

ital

op

tio

ns

Alth

ough

Nat

ural

Mot

ion

is t

he m

ost

idea

l set

ting,

it m

ay b

e pr

efer

able

to

switc

h ba

ck t

o D

igita

l Sca

n an

d/or

100

Hz.

To m

ake

all t

he 3

dig

ital o

ptio

ns a

vaila

ble

at t

he s

ame

time

and

sele

ctab

le,f

irst

sele

ct a

4:3

pic

ture

form

at.

• 10

0 H

z=

100

Hz

only

(Fi

eld

flick

er r

educ

tion)

• D

ig.S

can

= 1

00 H

z +

Dig

.Sca

n (F

ield

and

line

flic

ker

redu

ctio

n)•

Nat

ura

l M

oti

on

= 1

00 H

z +

Dig

.Sca

n +

Nat

ural

Mot

ion

(Fie

ld a

nd li

nefli

cker

red

uctio

n an

d sm

ooth

mov

emen

t re

prod

uctio

n)•

Do

ubl

e lin

es=

pro

vide

s fo

r a

doub

ling

of v

ertic

al r

esol

utio

n w

hich

add

s as

toni

shin

g sh

arpn

ess

and

a to

tal a

bsen

ce o

f vis

ible

pic

ture

line

s.M

otio

n co

mpe

nsat

ion

redu

ces

jitte

r an

d of

fers

sm

ooth

,yet

sha

rp m

otio

n re

prod

uctio

n.

Not

e:if

the

men

u ite

m D

igita

l opt

ions

is n

ot p

rese

nt,f

irst

sele

ct a

4:3

pic

ture

form

atw

ith t

he q

key.

Dyn

amic

Co

ntr

ast

To m

ake

the

cont

rast

in t

he d

arke

r an

d th

e br

ight

er p

ictu

re a

reas

mor

eno

ticea

ble,

sele

ct t

he M

edse

ttin

g.In

cer

tain

cir

cum

stan

ces

it m

ay b

e pr

efer

red

to s

elec

t M

in,M

axor

Off.

The

mod

ified

adj

ustm

ents

for

Con

tras

t,Br

ight

ness

,Col

our,

Shar

pnes

s,T

int,

Dig

ital S

can

and

Dyn

amic

Con

tras

t ar

e au

tom

atic

ally

sto

red

for

all T

Vch

anne

ls.

Sele

ct F

acto

ry s

etti

ngs

in t

he S

etup

men

u to

res

tore

the

pre

defin

ed fa

ctor

yse

ttin

gs,s

ee p

.7.

Use

of

the

men

us

PICTURE

Contrast

Brightness

Colour

Sharpness

Tint

Digital options

Dynamic Contrast

JContrast

L

M

MAIN

MENU

Contrast

SOUND

FEATURES

PROGRAMMES

JPICTURE

curs

or t

o se

lect

adju

stm

ents

retu

rn o

r sw

itch

mai

n m

enu

on/o

ff

VP

21

3B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

INST

AN

TQ

yÚ

OK

key

to a

ctiv

ate

10U

se o

f th

e re

mo

te c

on

tro

l

yÚ

VP

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

hA

ctiv

e co

ntr

ol

Act

ive

cont

rol i

s a

pro-

activ

e an

d au

tom

atic

sys

tem

.The

TV

con

tinuo

usly

mea

sure

s an

d co

rrec

ts a

ll in

com

ing

sign

als

in o

rder

to

prov

ide

the

best

pict

ure

poss

ible

.Pr

ess

the

hke

y t

o se

lect

the

Act

ive

Con

trol

val

ues

Off

or O

n.O

ffSh

arpn

ess

and

Dyn

amic

Con

tras

t ar

e co

ntro

lled

auto

mat

ical

lyO

nSh

arpn

ess,

Dyn

amic

Con

tras

t an

d N

oise

Red

uctio

n ar

e co

ntro

lled

auto

mat

ical

ly.

Pres

s th

e cu

rsor

in t

he u

p/do

wn

dire

ctio

ns w

hile

the

sel

ecte

d A

ctiv

eC

ontr

ol s

ettin

g in

form

atio

n is

on

top

of t

he s

cree

n.T

he A

ctiv

e C

ontr

ol m

enu

appe

ars.

The

pic

ture

set

tings

are

bei

ng a

dapt

ed c

ontin

uous

ly a

nd a

utom

atic

ally

.T

he m

enu

item

s ca

nnot

be

sele

cted

.Pr

ess

the

curs

or in

the

up/

dow

n di

rect

ions

aga

in t

o sw

itch

off t

he m

enu.

wS

elec

t p

erip

her

als

Pres

s th

is k

ey r

epea

tedl

y to

sel

ect

EX

T1,

EX

T2,

EX

T3

or F

RO

NT

,acc

ordi

ng t

o w

here

you

conn

ecte

d th

e pe

riph

eral

s (p

.24)

.

Sm

art

Key

sTo

sel

ect

pred

efin

ed p

ictu

re a

nd s

ound

sett

ings

.

M

Sm

art

So

un

dEa

ch t

ime

it is

pre

ssed

,a d

iffer

ent

soun

dse

ttin

g is

sel

ecte

d,co

rres

pond

ing

with

spec

ific

fact

ory

sett

ings

of t

he e

qual

izer

.

aS

mar

t P

ictu

reEa

ch t

ime

it is

pre

ssed

,a d

iffer

ent

pict

ure

sett

ing

is s

elec

ted,

corr

espo

ndin

g w

ithsp

ecifi

c fa

ctor

y se

ttin

gs o

f Con

tras

t,C

olou

r,Sh

arpn

ess

and

Dyn

amic

Con

tras

t.

Per

son

alre

fers

to

the

pers

onal

pre

fere

nce

sett

ings

of p

ictu

re a

nd s

ound

sel

ecte

d in

the

pict

ure

and

soun

d m

enu.

Rem

ark:

the

mom

ent

you

are

in a

pre

defin

edsm

art

soun

d or

pic

ture

set

ting

and

you

mod

ify a

sett

ing

in t

he p

ictu

re o

r so

und

men

u,al

l val

ues

ofth

e m

enu

will

over

writ

e th

e pr

evio

usly

mad

ese

ttin

gs.

XB

ilin

gual

ch

oic

e an

d

sou

nd

mo

de

sele

ctio

n

Pres

s th

is k

ey

• to

sw

itch

from

Ste

reo

to M

on

oso

und,

inca

se o

f ste

reo

tran

smis

sion

,or

from

Nic

am S

tere

oto

Nic

am a

vaila

ble,

in c

ase

of d

igita

l tra

nsm

issi

on;

• to

cho

ose

betw

een

lang

uage

Y(D

ual Y

) or

lang

uage

Z(D

ual Z

),in

cas

e of

bili

ngua

ltr

ansm

issi

on.T

he s

ettin

g is

sep

arat

ely

stor

ed fo

r ea

ch T

V c

hann

el.

SF

reez

eTo

act

ivat

e/de

-act

ivat

e th

e fr

ozen

pic

ture

or

to h

old

a te

lete

xt p

age.

b

Dua

l scr

een,

see

p.14

qP

ictu

re f

orm

atPr

ess

this

key

rep

eate

dly

to s

elec

t an

othe

rpi

ctur

e fo

rmat

:4:3

,Mov

ie E

xpan

d 14

:9,

Mov

ie E

xpan

d 16

:9 w

ith o

r w

ithou

t su

btitl

ing,

Wid

e Sc

reen

,Sup

er Z

oom

or

Aut

omat

ic(w

hen

Aut

o fo

rmat

is s

et t

o Ye

s in

the

SE

TU

Pm

enu)

.A

utom

atic

mak

es t

he p

ictu

re t

o fil

l the

scre

en a

s m

uch

as p

ossi

ble.

Som

etim

es a

lso

vide

o re

cord

er p

rogr

amm

esca

rry

spec

ial s

igna

ls w

hich

will

aut

omat

ical

lysw

itch

the

TV

to

the

corr

ect

scre

en fo

rmat

.Au

to fo

rmat

is d

isabl

ed w

hen

in D

ual s

cree

n.W

hen

in M

ovie

Exp

and

14:9

or

16:9

or

Supe

r Z

oom

pic

ture

form

at y

ou c

an m

ake

subt

itles

vis

ible

with

the

cur

sor

up/d

own.


13U

se o

f th

e m

enu

s

Feat

ure

s m

enu

&Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to d

ispl

ay/c

ance

l the

MA

IN M

EN

U.

éU

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n di

rect

ions

to

sele

ct t

he F

EA

TU

RE

Sm

enu.

“U

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n,le

ft/r

ight

dir

ectio

ns t

o se

lect

the

men

u ite

m.

‘U

se t

he O

Kke

y t

o ac

tivat

e.

(Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

repe

ated

ly t

o re

turn

or

to s

witc

h th

e m

enu

off.

Sle

epti

mer

With

the

sle

eptim

er y

ou c

an s

et a

tim

e pe

riod

aft

er w

hich

the

TV

sho

uld

switc

h its

elf t

o st

andb

y.T

he c

ount

er r

uns

from

Off

up t

o 18

0 m

in.

One

min

ute

befo

re t

he T

V is

set

to

go t

o st

andb

y,th

e re

mai

ning

sec

onds

appe

ar o

n sc

reen

.N

ot v

isib

le in

dua

l scr

een

mod

e.Yo

u ca

n al

way

s sw

itch

off

your

set

ear

lier

or c

hang

e th

e se

t tim

e.

Ch

ild l

ock

If th

e ch

ild lo

ck is

on,

the

TV

can

onl

y be

sw

itche

d on

with

the

rem

ote

cont

rol.T

he P

- an

d +

key

s on

top

of t

he T

V c

anno

t be

use

d to

sel

ect

a T

Vch

anne

l.In

thi

s w

ay y

ou c

an p

reve

nt u

naut

hori

sed

use

of y

our

TV.

If th

e m

essa

geC

hild

lo

ck O

nap

pear

s,th

e ch

ild lo

ck m

ust

be s

witc

hed

off

befo

re y

ou c

an u

se t

he P

- an

d +

key

s on

top

of t

he T

V t

o se

lect

a T

Vch

anne

l.

Su

bti

tle

TV

cha

nnel

s w

ith t

elet

ext

ofte

n tr

ansm

it ce

rtai

n pr

ogra

mm

es w

ith s

ubtit

ling.

See

Tele

text

,Con

tinuo

us S

ubtit

les,

p.21

how

to

sele

ct t

he p

rope

r su

btitl

epa

ge fr

om t

he t

elet

ext

inde

x.Se

lect

Su

bti

tle

On

or O

ff.

Pres

s th

e M

EN

Uke

y to

sw

itch

off t

he F

eatu

res

men

u.

Pro

gram

me

list

&Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to d

ispl

ay/c

ance

l the

MA

IN M

EN

U.

éSe

lect

PR

OG

RA

MM

ES

with

the

cur

sor

up/d

own.

“Pr

ess

the

curs

or r

ight

to

disp

lay

an o

verv

iew

of a

ll th

e T

V c

hann

els

inst

alle

d.

‘Pr

ess

the

curs

or u

p/do

wn

to r

un t

hrou

gh t

he li

st a

nd p

ress

OK

to s

elec

t th

ede

sire

d T

V c

hann

el.

(Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to s

witc

h of

f the

Pro

gram

me

list.

Sleeptimer

Off

Child lock

Off

Subtitle

Off

JFEATURES

OK

key

to a

ctiv

ate

curs

or t

o se

lect

adju

stm

ents

retu

rn o

r sw

itch

mai

n m

enu

on/o

ff

VP

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

INST

AN

TQ

yÚ

12U

se o

f th

e m

enu

s

So

un

d m

enu

&Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

to d

ispl

ay/c

ance

l the

MA

IN M

EN

U.

éU

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n di

rect

ions

to

sele

ct t

he S

OU

ND

men

u.

“U

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n,le

ft/r

ight

dir

ectio

ns t

o se

lect

the

men

u ite

m.

‘U

se t

he O

Kke

y t

o ac

tivat

e.

(Pr

ess

the

ME

NU

key

repe

ated

ly t

o re

turn

or

to s

witc

h th

e m

enu

off.

The

mod

ified

adj

ustm

ents

for V

olum

e,Ba

lanc

e,an

d G

raph

ic e

qual

izer

are

auto

mat

ical

ly s

tore

d fo

r al

l TV

cha

nnel

s.Se

lect

Fac

tory

set

tin

gsin

the

Set

up m

enu

to r

esto

re t

he p

rede

fined

fact

ory

sett

ings

,see

p.7

.

Gra

ph

ic E

qu

aliz

erH

ere

you

can

sele

ct t

he p

refe

rred

sou

nd s

ettin

g w

hich

cor

resp

onds

with

the

pers

onal

sou

nd s

ettin

gs.

Hea

dp

ho

ne

volu

me

See

Con

nect

Per

iphe

ral E

quip

men

t,p.

23,f

or t

he c

onne

ctio

n of

the

head

phon

e.

AV

L

(Au

tom

atic

Vo

lum

e L

evel

ler)

AV

L au

tom

atic

ally

con

trol

s th

e vo

lum

e le

vel t

o av

oid

too

larg

e le

vel

diffe

renc

es,e

spec

ially

whe

n sw

itchi

ng t

o an

othe

r pr

ogra

mm

e or

dur

ing

com

mer

cial

bre

aks.

AV

L w

ill r

educ

e th

e dy

nam

ics

of t

he s

ound

.To

mai

ntai

n or

igin

al d

ynam

ics,

use

the

Del

ta v

olum

e fe

atur

e.

Del

ta v

olu

me

Her

e yo

u m

ay a

djus

t th

e vo

lum

e di

ffere

nces

of e

ach

sele

cted

TV

cha

nnel

or

exte

rnal

dev

ice

sepa

rate

ly.T

his

can

com

pens

ate

volu

me

diffe

renc

es b

etw

een

diffe

rent

bro

adca

ster

s.U

se t

he -

P +

keys

to

com

pare

to

the

volu

me

of o

ther

TV

cha

nnel

s or

exte

rnal

s.

Vir

tual

Do

lby

effe

ctV

irtu

al D

olby

ena

bles

you

to

expe

rien

ce t

he e

ffect

of D

olby

Sur

roun

d Pr

oLo

gic

with

out

the

need

of h

avin

g re

ar s

peak

ers

conn

ecte

d or

act

ivat

ed.

Sele

ct t

he le

vel o

f Vir

tual

Do

lby

effe

ctw

ith t

he c

urso

r le

ft/r

ight

.

OK

key

to a

ctiv

ate

curs

or t

o se

lect

adju

stm

ents

retu

rn o

r sw

itch

mai

n m

enu

on/o

ff

VP

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

INST

AN

TQ

yÚ

SOUND

Volume

Balance

Graphic Equalizer

Headphone Volume

AVL

Delta volume

Virtual Dolby effect

JVolume

L

M


15N

EX

TV

IEW

Toda

y,m

ost

broa

dcas

ters

in E

urop

e,ar

e of

feri

ng t

elet

ext

page

s co

ntai

ning

th

eir

prog

ram

me

sche

dule

of t

oday

.The

se p

ages

can

be

requ

este

d by

sw

itchi

ngth

e T

V t

o Te

lete

xt G

uid

e.A

n in

crea

sing

num

ber

of b

road

cast

ers

are

offe

ring

an

exte

nded

pro

gram

me

guid

e se

rvic

e ca

lled

NE

XT

VIE

W.N

EXT

VIE

Wis

a n

ew w

ay o

f pre

sent

ing

prog

ram

me

sche

dule

s an

d of

fers

mor

e fe

atur

es t

han

com

mon

tel

etex

t.W

ith N

EXT

VIE

Wit

is p

ossi

ble

to s

how

for

inst

ance

all

the

mov

ies

com

ing

toni

ght.

Both

faci

litie

s ar

e in

tegr

ated

in t

his

TV

:NEX

TV

IEW

and

Tele

text

Pro

gram

me

Gui

de.I

f a T

V c

hann

el s

uppo

rts

NEX

TV

IEW

then

the

TV

will

aut

omat

ical

ly

pres

ent

the

NEX

TV

IEW

prog

ram

me

sche

dule

.If t

he T

V c

hann

el s

uppo

rts

just

te

lete

xt,t

hen

the

TV

will

sw

itch

auto

mat

ical

ly t

o Te

lete

xt G

uide

.Bo

th fa

cilit

ies

are

offe

ring

the

sam

e fu

nctio

ns:r

ecor

d,re

min

d an

d in

fo.

How

ever

in c

ase

of T

elet

ext

Gui

de t

he b

road

cast

er is

res

pons

ible

if t

hese

func

tions

are

pos

sibl

e.Yo

u ca

n se

arch

for

the

prog

ram

mes

you

wan

t to

wat

ch u

p to

7 d

ays

in a

dvan

ce.

It is

als

o po

ssib

le t

o se

arch

for

a pr

ogra

mm

e by

the

me,

e.g.

spor

t,m

ovie

,etc

.O

nce

a pr

ogra

mm

e ha

s be

en s

elec

ted

it ca

n be

tag

ged,

to r

emin

d yo

u,or

to

reco

rd o

n th

e vi

deo

reco

rder

aut

omat

ical

ly (

prov

ided

the

vid

eo r

ecor

der

iseq

uipp

ed w

ithN

EXT

VIE

WLi

nk L

evel

2.0

),on

ce,d

aily,

wee

kly

or s

erie

s.Te

lete

xt G

uide

/ NEX

TV

IEW

also

allo

ws

dire

ct a

cces

s to

det

aile

d in

form

atio

nab

out

prog

ram

mes

if p

rovi

ded

by t

he b

road

cast

er.

The

broa

dcas

ter

is re

spon

sible

for

the

cont

ents

of

the

info

rmat

ion.

The

TV is

res

pons

ible

for

the

capt

ure

of t

hat

info

rmat

ion

and

for

the

pres

enta

tion

toth

e us

er.

Use

of

the

Tele

text

Gu

ide/

NE

XT

VIE

Wm

enu

s

&Pr

ess

the

æke

y on

the

rem

ote

cont

rol t

o di

spla

y/ca

ncel

the

Tel

etex

t G

uide

/N

EXT

VIE

Wm

enu.

éU

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

up/

dow

n,le

ft/r

ight

dir

ectio

ns t

o se

lect

the

dat

e,C

HA

NN

EL

for

the

chan

nel g

uide

,TH

EM

Efo

r th

e th

eme

guid

e,O

VE

RV

IEW

for

an o

verv

iew

of a

ll th

e pr

ogra

mm

es w

hich

are

mar

ked

as r

emin

ders

or

for

reco

rdin

g,th

e pr

ogra

mm

e gu

ide

page

num

ber

or t

o en

ter

the

prog

ram

me

list.

NE

XT

VIE

W/ T

elet

ext

Gu

ide

Channel Overview

BBC1

BBC2

p.202

p 01 02 ...

π

BBC1

11.03

................

14.35

................ 226/3

17.50

................ 231

Record

Remind

Info

Tele

text

Gu

ide

NE

XT

VIE

W

Monday 9 Oct 18:03

Channel

Theme Overview

BBC1

NEXTVIEW

What’s on now

Preview

Themes

Ratings

Record

Remind

Info

“En

ter

the

prop

er p

rogr

amm

e gu

ide

page

num

ber

with

the

dig

it ke

ys o

r w

ith t

he –

P +

key

s.

‘Pr

ess

the

curs

or le

ft/r

ight

to

run

thro

ugh

the

subp

ages

.

(Se

lect

a p

rogr

amm

e w

ith t

he c

urso

r up

/dow

n.

§Pr

ess

one

of t

he c

olou

r ke

ys t

o se

lect

one

of t

heba

sic

func

tions

(if

avai

labl

e);r

eco

rd,r

emin

d,i

nfo

.Se

e Ba

sic

func

tions

furt

her

on.

èPr

ess

the

OK

key

to r

etur

n to

the

hea

der

area

agai

n.

“Se

lect

a p

rogr

amm

e w

ith t

he c

urso

r up

/dow

n.

‘Pr

ess

one

of t

he c

olou

r ke

ys t

o se

lect

one

of t

heba

sic

func

tions

(if

avai

labl

e);r

eco

rd,r

emin

d,i

nfo

.Se

e Ba

sic

func

tions

furt

her

on.

(Pr

ess

the

OK

key

to r

etur

n to

the

hea

der

area

agai

n.

curs

or t

o se

lect

adju

stm

ents

VP

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

¬fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

æ MEN

U

yÚ

NEX

TV

IEW

sele

ctio

n

14D

ual

Scr

een

&Pr

ess

the

bke

y to

sw

itch

on D

ual S

cree

n.T

he T

V s

cree

n is

div

ided

into

2 p

arts

:-

the

left

sid

e fo

r th

e no

rmal

mai

n pi

ctur

e,-

the

righ

t si

de fo

r te

lete

xt b

road

cast

by

the

sele

cted

TV

cha

nnel

or

for

NEX

TV

IEW

/Tel

etex

t G

uide

.To

ope

rate

NEX

TV

IEW

/Tel

etex

t G

uide

,see

p.1

5.To

ope

rate

tel

etex

t,se

e p.

19.

If D

ual S

cree

n is

Off,

the

pict

ure,

tele

text

or

NEX

TVIE

W/T

elet

ext

Gui

de a

re d

ispla

yed

full

scre

en.

éPr

ess

the

qke

y to

sel

ect

a ve

rtic

al s

quee

zed

or a

non

ver

tical

squ

eeze

dpi

ctur

e si

ze

“Pr

ess

+ P

-to

run

thr

ough

the

tel

etex

t pa

ges.

‘W

hen

in T

elet

ext

Dua

l Scr

een,

pres

s th

e b

key

to r

etur

n to

a fu

ll pi

ctur

esc

reen

or

pres

s th

e b

key

to

retu

rn t

o a

full

Tele

text

scr

een.

(W

hen

in N

EXT

VIE

W/T

elet

ext

Gui

de D

ual S

cree

n,pr

ess

the

æke

y to

ret

urn

to a

full

pict

ure

scre

en o

r pr

ess

the

bke

y to

ret

urn

to a

full

NEX

TV

IEW

/Tel

etex

t G

uide

scr

een.

VP

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

bS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊ q

INST

AN

TQ

b q

æ

b

yÚ

Du

al S

cree

n


17N

EX

TV

IEW

Bas

ic f

un

ctio

ns

The

func

tions

Rec

ord,

Rem

ind

and

Info

can

be

activ

ated

with

the

corr

espo

ndin

g co

lour

key

s on

the

rem

ote

cont

rol.

If th

e fu

nctio

n is

not

ava

ilabl

e,th

en t

he t

ext

is s

how

n at

red

uced

bri

ghtn

ess.

Sele

ct a

pro

gram

me

with

the

cur

sor

up/d

own.

Rec

ord

Ro

r R

emin

d !

&Pr

ess

the

red

colo

ur k

ey t

o ac

tivat

e R

eco

rdor

the

gre

en c

olou

r ke

y to

activ

ate

Rem

ind.

If th

e pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

r of

the

bro

adca

ster

is n

ot y

et k

now

n,a

mes

sage

app

ears

with

the

req

uest

to

inpu

t th

e co

rrec

t pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

r w

ith t

he c

urso

r le

ft/rig

htan

d pr

ess

OK.

A s

mal

l men

u po

ps u

p in

whi

ch y

ou c

an c

hoos

e th

e in

terv

al:o

nce,

daily

or

wee

kly,

or c

lear

an

earl

ier

mad

e re

cord

or

rem

ind

sett

ing.

The

def

ault

inte

rval

is s

et t

o O

nce

.If a

pro

gram

me

is a

n ep

isod

e of

a s

erie

s,it

is id

entif

ied

by t

hesy

stem

and

the

opt

ions

dai

lyan

d w

eekl

yar

e re

plac

ed b

y th

e op

tion

seri

es.I

nth

is c

ase

the

syst

em id

entif

ies

whe

n th

e ne

xt e

piso

de o

f the

ser

ies

will

be

broa

dcas

t.T

his

is n

ot p

ossi

ble

in t

he T

elet

ext

guid

e.

éU

se t

he c

urso

r in

the

left

/rig

ht d

irec

tions

to

sele

ct t

he in

terv

al.

The

col

our

of t

he t

ag r

efer

s to

the

inte

rval

.

“Pr

ess

the

OK

key.

Whe

n R

eco

rd R

is a

ctiv

ated

:S

tori

ng

is d

ispl

ayed

to

indi

cate

the

vid

eo r

ecor

der

is p

rogr

amm

ed.

Whe

n R

emin

d !

is a

ctiv

ated

:-

a m

essa

ge w

ill b

e di

spla

yed

the

mom

ent

the

tagg

ed p

rogr

amm

e w

ith !

star

ts,w

hen

wat

chin

g th

e T

V la

ter

on.

-th

e T

V s

witc

hes

on t

he m

omen

t th

e ta

gged

pro

gram

me

with

!st

arts

,w

hen

the

TV

is in

sta

ndby

.N

ote:

Reco

rdin

gs a

nd r

emin

ders

are

not

pos

sible

whe

n th

e br

oadc

aste

r do

es n

ottra

nsm

it da

tes

and

times

of

the

prog

ram

mes

.Th

e m

essa

ge N

o T

V p

rogr

amm

ing

pos

sibl

eap

pear

s.M

ake

sure

you

are

on

the

TV p

rogr

amm

ing

page

.

Info

&

Pres

s th

e ye

llow

col

our

key

to a

ctiv

ate

Info

.A

dver

tisem

ents

or

info

rmat

ion

rela

ting

to t

he s

elec

ted

prog

ram

me

are

disp

laye

d.In

som

e ca

ses

all o

f the

info

rmat

ion

does

not

fit

on t

he s

cree

n.U

seth

e cu

rsor

up/

dow

n to

bro

wse

thr

ough

all

the

info

rmat

ion.

éPr

ess

the

yello

w c

olou

r ke

y ag

ain

to s

witc

h of

f the

info

rmat

ion.

Record

Remind

Info

Info block

Date time

CHANNEL THEME OVERVIEW

CNN

11.03

Travel Guide

14.35

World news

17.50

Insight

............................

R !pOnce

πDaily Weekly Clear

16N

EX

TV

IEW

Tele

text

gu

ide

TV

cha

nnel

s w

hich

bro

adca

st t

elet

ext

also

tra

nsm

it a

page

with

the

prog

ram

me

guid

e of

the

day

.For

eac

h se

lect

ed T

V c

hann

el t

he p

rogr

amm

e gu

ide

page

can

be

sele

cted

with

the

æke

y:-

auto

mat

ical

ly if

the

sel

ecte

d T

V c

hann

el s

uppo

rts

serv

ices

like

PD

C(P

rogr

amm

e D

eliv

ery

Con

trol

) or

MIP

(M

agaz

ine

Inve

ntor

y Pa

ge).

- if

auto

mat

ic p

re-s

elec

tion

is n

ot p

ossi

ble

then

the

inde

x pa

ge is

dis

play

edan

d th

e pr

oper

pro

gram

me

guid

e pa

ge n

umbe

r of

the

sel

ecte

d T

V c

hann

elha

s to

be

ente

red

with

the

dig

it ke

ys.

The

pro

gram

me

guid

e pa

ge w

ill b

e st

ored

aut

omat

ical

ly o

nly

if it

satis

fies

Vid

eo P

rogr

amm

ing

via

Tele

text

(V

PT)

requ

irem

ents

.

Ever

y tim

e yo

u pr

ess

the

æke

y,th

e pr

ogra

mm

e gu

ide

page

of t

he

sele

cted

TV

cha

nnel

will

be

avai

labl

e if

the

TV

cha

nnel

doe

s no

t su

ppor

t N

EXT

VIE

W.

The

func

tion

item

s re

cord

,rem

ind

and

info

,cor

resp

ondi

ng w

ith t

he c

olou

red

keys

,bec

ome

high

light

ed if

the

dis

play

ed p

rogr

amm

e pa

ge s

atis

fies

the

Vid

eoPr

ogra

mm

ing

via

Tele

text

(V

PT)

requ

irem

ents

.Sel

ect

a pr

ogra

mm

e ite

m a

ndpr

ess

one

of t

he fu

nctio

n ke

ys,e

.g.R

ecor

d or

Rem

ind.

See

Basi

c fu

nctio

nsfu

rthe

r on

.T

he In

fo it

em is

ena

bled

if t

he s

elec

ted

prog

ram

me

cont

ains

a p

age

num

ber

with

an

optio

nal s

ubco

de r

efer

ring

to

a pa

ge w

ith m

ore

info

abo

ut t

hepr

ogra

mm

e.

NE

XT

VIE

Wm

od

es t

o s

ort

an

d r

epre

sen

t in

form

atio

n

Ch

ann

elT

he C

hann

el g

uide

pro

vide

s an

ove

rvie

w o

f all

prog

ram

mes

tha

t ar

ebr

oadc

ast

by a

sin

gle

chan

nel d

urin

g on

e da

y.A

lrea

dy p

asse

d pr

ogra

mm

es c

an b

e m

ade

visi

ble

via

curs

or u

p.T

he li

st w

ill s

tart

with

the

ear

liest

bro

adca

st p

rogr

amm

e.W

ith c

urso

r le

ft/r

ight

ano

ther

favo

urite

TV

cha

nnel

can

be

sele

cted

.

Th

eme

The

the

me

guid

e di

spla

ys a

list

of a

ll pr

ogra

mm

es a

t th

e se

lect

ed d

ate,

that

mat

ches

with

the

sel

ecte

d ca

tego

ry (

new

s,sp

ort,

cultu

re,m

ovie

s,…

).T

he d

efau

lt st

artin

g ite

m w

ill b

e th

e cu

rren

t or

nex

t pr

ogra

mm

e on

the

curr

ent T

V c

hann

el.

The

TH

EM

Ese

lect

ion

is o

nly

pres

ent

if pr

ogra

mm

es in

the

TV

gui

de h

ave

defin

ed t

hem

es.

Ove

rvie

wT

he O

verv

iew

men

u pr

ovid

es a

list

of p

rogr

amm

es t

hat

are

mar

ked

asre

min

ders

or

to b

e re

cord

ed e

ach

day.

Whe

n m

ore

than

one

pro

gram

me

to b

e re

cord

ed h

as a

n ov

erla

p in

tim

e,th

ese

prog

ram

mes

will

be

mar

ked

by a

red

col

our.

Aft

er t

he p

rogr

amm

e ha

s be

en b

road

cast

,all

item

s se

t fo

r on

ce w

ill b

ede

lete

d fr

om t

he li

st t

he fo

llow

ing

day.

Thi

s m

enu

can

be u

sed

to c

hang

e a

rem

inde

r or

rec

orde

r.

Not

e:th

e TV

will

auto

mat

ical

ly in

terp

ret

the

broa

dcas

t tim

e (a

s sh

own

on t

hete

lete

xt g

uide

) of

you

r se

lect

ed p

rogr

amm

e in

to t

he c

orre

ct lo

cal t

ime

and

date

.

Channel

Theme Overview

BBC1 BBC 2 CNN

p.202

p 01 02 ...

π

BBC 2

11.03

................

14.35

................ 226/3

17.50

................ 231

One moment please

Record

Remind

Info

Monday 9 Oct 18:03

Channel

Theme Overview

BBC1

CNN BBC2

BBC1 NEXTVIEW

........

........

........

Record

Remind

Info

Monday 9 Oct 18:03

Channel Theme

Overview

Culture Movie ....

BBC1 NEXTVIEW

BBC1

CNN

TVE

Record

Remind

Info

Monday 9 Oct 18:03

Channel Theme Overview

BBC1 NEXTVIEW

BBC1

17.10

CNN

17.30

TVE

18.05

BBC2

19.00

Record

Remind

Info


19Te

lete

xt

Mos

t TV

cha

nnel

s br

oadc

ast

info

rmat

ion

via

tele

text

.Ea

ch c

hann

el w

hich

bro

adca

sts

tele

text

tra

nsm

its a

pag

e w

ith in

form

atio

n on

how

to

use

its t

elet

ext

syst

em.L

ook

for

the

tele

text

pag

e w

ith t

he m

ain

inde

x (u

sual

ly p

.100

).D

epen

ding

on

the

TV

cha

nnel

,tel

etex

t is

tra

nsm

itted

in d

iffer

ent

syst

ems.

The

col

ours

use

d in

the

opt

ions

line

cor

resp

ond

with

the

col

our

keys

of y

our

rem

ote

cont

rol.

Ab

ou

t E

asy

Text

Ea

sy T

ext

cons

ider

ably

red

uces

the

wai

ting

time

(on

cond

ition

tha

t th

ete

lete

xt b

road

cast

of t

he p

artic

ular

TV

cha

nnel

is r

ecei

ved

for

at le

ast

half

am

inut

e) b

y :

•a

dire

ct s

elec

tion

of p

revi

ous

and

follo

win

g pa

ges

whi

ch a

re in

tra

nsm

issi

onan

d of

the

pag

es r

efer

red

to in

the

opt

ions

line

• a

habi

t w

atch

er li

st:f

requ

ently

use

d pa

ges

are

put

auto

mat

ical

ly in

a li

st o

fpr

efer

red

page

s,so

tha

t th

ey a

re im

med

iate

ly a

vaila

ble

• th

e pr

ecap

turi

ng o

f the

pag

e nu

mbe

rs r

efer

red

to in

the

dis

play

ed p

age

•th

e pr

ecap

turi

ng o

f all

the

subp

ages

.

Sw

itch

Tel

etex

t o

n a

nd

off

Pres

s b

to s

witc

h th

e te

lete

xt o

n or

off.

The

mai

n in

dex

page

app

ears

on

the

scre

en t

oget

her

with

tw

o in

form

atio

nlin

es a

t th

e to

p an

d on

e op

tion

line

at t

he b

otto

m o

f the

scr

een.

Rem

ark:

if th

e di

spla

yed

tele

text

cha

ract

ers

on s

cree

n do

not

cor

resp

ond

with

the

char

acte

rs u

sed

in y

our

lang

uage

,pre

ss t

he X

key

repe

ated

ly to

sel

ect

Lang

uage

grou

p 1

or 2

.

Sel

ect

a Te

lete

xt p

age

Wit

h t

he

dig

it k

eys

Ente

r th

e de

sire

d pa

ge n

umbe

r w

ith t

he d

igit

keys

.T

he p

age

coun

ter

seek

s th

e pa

ge o

r th

e pa

ge a

ppea

rs im

med

iate

ly w

hen

the

page

num

ber

has

been

sto

red

in t

he m

emor

y.A

mes

sage

app

ears

whe

n yo

u ha

ve e

nter

ed a

non

exi

sten

t or

inco

rrec

t pa

genu

mbe

r.Pa

ge n

umbe

rs b

egin

ning

with

0 o

r 9

do n

ot e

xist

.Cho

ose

anot

her

num

ber.

Wit

h t

he

op

tio

n l

ine

Sele

ct w

ith t

he c

olou

r ke

ys,c

orre

spon

ding

to

the

colo

ured

opt

ions

at

the

bott

om o

f the

scr

een,

the

desi

red

subj

ect.

Sel

ect

Pic

ture

/Tel

etex

tSe

lect

a T

V c

hann

el w

hich

bro

adca

sts

tele

text

.Pr

ess

the

bke

y.T

he s

cree

n is

div

ided

into

tw

o pa

rts:

the

left

sid

e fo

r th

e no

rmal

mai

n pi

ctur

e,th

e ri

ght

side

for

tele

text

bro

adca

st b

y th

e se

lect

ed T

V c

hann

el.

Pres

s th

e b

key

to r

etur

n to

a fu

ll sc

reen

pic

ture

or

pres

s th

e b

key

tore

turn

to

a fu

ll te

lete

xt p

ictu

re.

Qu

ickl

y ru

n t

hro

ugh

th

e te

lete

xt p

ages

Pres

s th

e cu

rsor

up/

dow

n or

the

- P

+ke

y to

run

thr

ough

the

pre

viou

s or

the

follo

win

g pa

ges.

Sel

ect

the

pre

vio

usl

y se

lect

ed t

elet

ext

pag

ePr

ess

the

0ke

y.

Tele

text

curs

or t

o se

lect

page

s

colo

ur k

eys

to s

elec

t

VP

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

b bX

0

MEN

U

yÚ

OK

key

to a

ctiv

ate

18N

EX

TV

IEW

Sel

ect

Pic

ture

/ NE

XT

VIE

W-T

elet

ext

Gu

ide

Pres

s th

e æ

key.

Pres

s th

e b

key

.T

he s

cree

n is

div

ided

into

tw

o pa

rts:

the

left

sid

e fo

r th

e no

rmal

mai

n pi

ctur

e,th

e ri

ght

side

for

NEX

TV

IEW

/Tel

etex

t G

uide

.Pr

ess

the

bke

y to

ret

urn

to a

full

NEX

TV

IEW

/Tel

etex

t gu

ide

scre

en,o

r pr

ess

the

æke

y to

ret

urn

to a

full

pict

ure

scre

en.

Acq

uis

itio

n a

nd

up

dat

ing

of

NE

XT

VIE

Win

form

atio

nA

cqui

sitio

n an

d up

datin

g of

NEX

TV

IEW

is d

one

whe

n yo

u ar

e w

atch

ing

a T

Vch

anne

l sup

port

ing

NEX

TV

IEW

.

Vid

eo r

eco

rder

res

tric

tio

ns

wit

h N

EX

TV

IEW

The

Rec

ord

item

and

the

aut

omat

ic r

ecor

ding

will

onl

y be

pre

sent

and

poss

ible

if y

our

vide

o re

cord

er is

equ

ippe

d w

ith N

EXT

VIE

WLi

nk.

Your

vid

eo r

ecor

der

shou

ld b

e co

nnec

ted

to E

XT

ER

NA

L 2

.See

Con

nect

Peri

pher

al E

quip

men

t,p.

22.

The

dai

ly,w

eekl

y an

d se

ries

opt

ions

,the

num

ber

of r

ecor

ding

s se

t an

d th

ew

ay o

verl

appi

ng r

ecor

ding

s ar

e m

anag

ed,d

epen

d on

the

typ

e of

vid

eore

cord

er y

ou h

ave.

Whe

n al

l vid

eo r

ecor

der

timer

s ar

e fu

ll,th

e ite

m R

eco

rdin

the

men

u w

ill n

ot b

e pr

esen

t.

Upl

oad

vide

o re

cord

er o

verv

iew

Whe

n th

e T

V is

sw

itche

d on

,the

tim

er r

ecor

ding

s ar

e up

load

ed t

o th

e T

V t

och

eck

if an

y m

anua

l add

ition

or

dele

tions

hav

e be

en d

one.

Thi

s is

sho

wn

in t

heov

ervi

ew.

The

vid

eo r

ecor

der

man

ages

and

rem

oves

tim

er r

ecor

ding

s w

hen

perf

orm

ed.

Som

e N

EXT

VIE

WLi

nk v

ideo

rec

orde

rs d

o no

t al

low

a d

aily

pro

gram

min

g of

the

reco

rdin

g to

sta

rt o

n a

Satu

rday

or

Sund

ay.I

n th

is c

ase

the

item

dai

lyw

ill b

ere

mov

ed fr

om t

he m

enu

on t

hose

day

s.

VP

SMA

RT

DN

R

INST

AN

T

Ma

Q

®

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

æ

b

yÚ


21Te

lete

xt

Sel

ect

Co

nti

nuo

us

Su

bti

tles

TV

cha

nnel

s w

ith t

elet

ext

ofte

n tr

ansm

it pr

ogra

mm

es w

ith s

ubtit

ling.

For

each

TV

cha

nnel

you

can

sto

re a

sub

title

pag

e w

hich

will

be

disp

laye

dco

ntin

uous

ly if

the

pro

gram

me

bein

g br

oadc

ast

is t

rans

mitt

ed w

ith s

ubtit

les.

Switc

h on

tel

etex

t an

d se

lect

the

pro

per

subt

itle

page

from

the

inde

x.Sw

itch

off t

elet

ext.

Now

the

sub

title

pag

e is

sto

red

for

the

sele

cted

TV

cha

nnel

.

Onc

e su

btitl

es h

ave

been

sto

red

and

Su

bti

tle

On

has

been

sel

ecte

d th

ey w

illau

tom

atic

ally

be

disp

laye

d on

the

sel

ecte

d T

V c

hann

el if

sub

title

s ar

e in

the

tran

smis

sion

.Se

lect

Su

bti

tle

On

or O

ffin

the

Fea

ture

s m

enu,

see

p.13

.T

he s

ubtit

le s

ymbo

l jap

pear

s w

hen

Su

bti

tle

On

is s

elec

ted.

Rem

ark:

you

are

in t

elet

ext

mod

e,so

onl

y te

lete

xt f

unct

ions

are

ava

ilabl

e.

Shou

ld y

our

rem

ote

cont

rol b

e lo

st o

r br

oken

you

can

stil

l cha

nge

som

e of

the

basi

c pi

ctur

e se

ttin

gs w

ith t

he k

eys

on t

op o

f the

TV.

Pres

s th

e M

key

repe

ated

ly t

o se

lect

Vo

lum

e,B

righ

tnes

s,C

olo

ur,

Co

ntr

ast.

Pres

s th

e P

- or

+ k

eys

to c

arry

out

the

sel

ecte

d ad

just

men

t.W

hen

the

men

u ad

just

men

t is

not

dis

play

ed,t

he P

-or

+ke

ys e

nabl

e yo

u to

sel

ect

the

TV

cha

nnel

s,th

e V

- or

+ k

eys

to a

djus

t th

e vo

lum

e.

The

sele

cted

adj

ustm

ent

auto

mat

ical

ly sw

itche

s of

f w

hen

no a

ctio

n ha

s be

enex

ecut

ed fo

r 10

sec

onds

.

Key

s o

n t

op

of

the

TV

MP

V

20Te

lete

xt

Sel

ect

the

ind

ex t

elet

ext

pag

ePr

ess

the

whi

te c

olou

r ke

y to

dis

play

the

mai

n in

dex

(usu

ally

p.1

00).

On

ly f

or

T.O

.P t

elet

ext

bro

adca

sts

:T.

O.P

ord

ers

the

page

s in

cat

egor

ies

and

adds

oth

er p

ossi

bilit

ies

of e

nhan

cing

ease

of u

se.

Pres

s i

.A

T.O

.P.o

verv

iew

of t

he t

elet

ext

subj

ects

ava

ilabl

e is

dis

play

ed.

Not

all

TV

cha

nnel

s br

oadc

ast T

.O.P

.tel

etex

t.W

hen

the

tele

text

sys

tem

is

not

T.O

.P.t

elet

ext,

a m

essa

ge a

ppea

rs a

t th

e to

p of

the

scr

een.

Sele

ct w

ith t

he c

urso

r up

/dow

n,le

ft/r

ight

the

des

ired

sub

ject

and

pre

ss t

heO

Kke

y.

Sel

ect

sub

pag

esW

hen

a se

lect

ed t

elet

ext

page

con

sist

s of

diff

eren

t su

bpag

es,o

ne o

f th

esu

bpag

es a

ppea

rs o

n th

e sc

reen

.T

he c

olou

red

num

ber

in t

he fi

rst

info

rmat

ion

line

refe

rs t

o th

e di

spla

yed

subp

age.

The

oth

er s

ubpa

ges

can

be s

elec

ted

in 2

way

s :

Wit

h t

he

curs

or

left

/rig

ht

The

oth

er s

ubpa

ge n

umbe

rs a

ppea

r in

whi

te a

s so

on a

s th

e tr

ansm

issi

on h

asfo

und

them

.The

y ar

e st

ored

in t

he m

emor

y so

tha

t th

ey a

re a

vaila

ble

whi

leth

e te

lete

xt p

age

is o

n sc

reen

.Se

lect

with

the

cur

sor

left

/rig

ht t

he p

revi

ous

or t

he fo

llow

ing

subp

age.

Wit

h t

he

Uke

y•

Ente

r th

e su

bpag

e nu

mbe

r yo

urse

lf:Pr

ess

U.E

nter

the

des

ired

sub

page

with

the

dig

it ke

ys :

e.g.

3 fo

r th

e th

ird

page

of s

even

sub

page

s.T

he T

V s

earc

hes

for

the

sele

cted

sub

page

.

• Aut

omat

ical

ly r

otat

ing

subp

ages

:Pr

ess

Uag

ain

to c

ance

l the

ent

ered

dig

it ke

y fo

r th

e su

bpag

e.N

ow t

he s

ubpa

ges

rota

te a

utom

atic

ally

.

Pres

s U

agai

n to

sel

ect

the

subp

ages

with

the

cur

sor

left

/rig

ht a

gain

.

Sp

ecia

l te

lete

xt f

un

ctio

ns

Ho

ldPr

ess

Sto

sto

p th

e au

tom

atic

ally

rot

atin

g of

the

sub

page

s or

to

stop

the

page

cou

nter

from

see

king

whe

n yo

u ha

ve e

nter

ed a

wro

ng p

age

num

ber

orw

hen

the

page

is n

ot a

vaila

ble.

Ente

r an

othe

r pa

ge n

umbe

r.

En

larg

ePr

ess

hre

peat

edly

to

disp

lay

the

uppe

r pa

rt,t

he lo

wer

par

t an

d th

en t

ore

turn

to

the

norm

al p

age

size

.Whe

n th

e up

per

part

is d

ispl

ayed

,you

can

scro

ll th

e te

xt,l

ine

by li

ne u

sing

the

cur

sor

up/d

own.

Rev

eal

Pres

s f

to r

evea

l/con

ceal

the

hid

den

info

rmat

ion,

such

as

solu

tions

to

ridd

les

and

puzz

les.

curs

or t

o se

lect

subp

ages

OK

to a

ctiv

ate

VP

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

iU MEN

U

yÚ y

Ú

VP

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

f h S


23C

on

nec

t P

erip

her

al E

qu

ipm

ent

&In

sert

the

plu

g in

to t

he h

eadp

hone

soc

ket

Lat

the

rig

ht s

ide

of t

he T

V.

éPr

ess

¬on

the

rem

ote

cont

rol t

o sw

itch

off t

he in

tern

al lo

udsp

eake

rsof

the

TV.

The

head

phon

e im

peda

nce

mus

t be

bet

wee

n 8

and

4000

Ohm

.Th

e he

adph

one

sock

et h

as a

3.5

mm

jack

.

In t

he S

OU

ND

men

u se

lect

Hea

dp

ho

ne

volu

me

to a

djus

t th

e he

adph

one

volu

me,

see

p.12

.

L

Hea

dp

ho

ne

Con

nect

the

aud

io c

able

s to

the

aud

io in

put

of y

our

audi

o eq

uipm

ent

and

toA

UD

IO L

and

Rat

the

bac

k of

you

r T

V.

You

can

liste

n to

you

r T

V s

ound

via

you

r au

dio

equi

pmen

t.

If yo

u w

ant

to c

onne

ct m

ore

equi

pmen

t to

you

r T

V,co

nsul

t yo

ur d

eale

r.

Au

dio

eq

uip

men

t / A

mp

lifie

r

AU

DIO

&C

onne

ct y

our

cam

era

or c

amco

rder

to

sock

ets

at t

he r

ight

sid

e of

you

r T

V.

éC

onne

ct t

he e

quip

men

t to

VID

EO

2an

d A

UD

IO L

3fo

r m

ono

equi

pmen

t.

“Fo

r st

ereo

equ

ipm

ent

also

con

nect

AU

DIO

R3

.

S-V

HS

qual

ity w

ith a

n S-

VH

S ca

mco

rder

is o

btai

ned

by c

onne

ctin

g th

e S-

VH

Sca

bles

with

the

S-V

IDE

Oin

put

1 a

nd A

UD

IOin

puts

3.

Cam

era

& c

amco

rder

AU

DIO

VID

EO

S•V

IDEO

32

1

Con

nect

you

r di

gita

l equ

ipm

ent

with

a e

uroc

able

1to

one

of t

heeu

roco

nnec

tors

(E

XT

1,E

XT

2 or

EX

T3)

,or

with

a c

inch

cab

le t

o th

e V

IDE

Oin

put

at t

he r

ight

sid

e of

the

TV

(se

e ill

ustr

atio

n ab

ove)

.

Not

e:th

e lo

w q

ualit

y of

som

e di

gita

l pic

ture

mat

eria

l may

be

the

caus

e of

dig

ital

imag

e di

stor

tion.

In t

his

case

sel

ect

Eco

unde

r th

e SM

AR

TP

ICT

UR

Ea

key

on t

here

mot

e co

ntro

l as

this

sett

ing

is in

tend

ed t

o im

prov

e di

stor

ted

pict

ure

qual

ity.

Dig

ital

eq

uip

men

t (

DV

D,d

igit

al s

atel

lite

tun

er,..

.)

1/2

/3E

XT

ER

NA

L

DVD1

22C

on

nec

t P

erip

her

al E

qu

ipm

ent

Co

nn

ect

Per

iph

eral

Eq

uip

men

t

The

re is

a w

ide

rang

e of

aud

io a

nd v

ideo

equ

ipm

ent

that

can

be

conn

ecte

dto

you

r T

V.T

he fo

llow

ing

conn

ectio

n di

agra

ms

show

you

how

to

conn

ect

them

.

Con

nect

the

aer

ial c

able

s 1

,2an

d,to

obt

ain

the

optim

um p

ictu

re q

ualit

y,eu

roca

ble

3as

sho

wn

oppo

site

.

If yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r is

prov

ided

with

the

Eas

yLin

k fu

nctio

n,th

e eu

roca

ble

supp

lied

with

it s

houl

d be

con

nect

ed t

o E

XT

ER

NA

L 2

to b

enef

it fro

m t

he E

asyL

ink

func

tiona

lity.

If th

e eu

roca

ble

3is

not

use

d th

e fo

llow

ing

step

s ar

e re

quir

ed:

Sea

rch

fo

r an

d s

tore

th

e te

st s

ign

al o

f th

e vi

deo

rec

ord

er

&U

nplu

g th

e ae

rial

cab

le 1

from

the

aer

ial s

ocke

t x

of y

our

vide

o re

cord

er.

éSw

itch

on y

our

TV

and

put

the

vid

eo r

ecor

der

on t

he t

est

sign

al.

(See

the

han

dboo

k fo

r yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r.)

“Se

arch

for

the

test

sig

nal o

f you

r vi

deo

reco

rder

in t

he s

ame

way

as

you

sear

ched

for

and

stor

ed t

he T

V s

igna

ls.S

ee In

stal

latio

n,Se

arch

ing

for

and

stor

ing

TV

cha

nnel

s,M

anua

l ins

talla

tion,

p.5.

‘St

ore

the

test

sig

nal u

nder

pro

gram

me

num

ber

0 or

bet

wee

n 90

and

99.

(R

epla

ce t

he a

eria

l cab

le in

the

aer

ial s

ocke

t x

of y

our

vide

o re

cord

er a

fter

you

have

sto

red

the

test

sig

nal.

Dec

od

er a

nd

vid

eo r

eco

rder

Con

nect

a e

uroc

able

4to

you

r de

code

r an

d to

the

spe

cial

eur

ocon

nect

orof

you

r vi

deo

reco

rder

.See

als

o th

e vi

deo

reco

rder

han

dboo

k.Se

e D

efin

e D

ecod

er/D

escr

ambl

er p

rog.

num

bers

,p.7

.Yo

u ca

n al

so c

onne

ct y

our

deco

der

dire

ctly

to

EX

TE

RN

AL

1or

2w

ith a

euro

cabl

e.

Vid

eo r

eco

rder

an

d o

ther

per

iph

eral

s(e

xcep

t D

igita

l Sou

rces

)

&C

onne

ct t

he a

eria

l cab

les

1,2

and

3as

sho

wn

oppo

site

.Bet

ter

pict

ure

qual

ity c

an b

e ob

tain

ed if

you

als

o co

nnec

t eu

roca

ble

5to

EX

TE

RN

AL

2an

d a

euro

cabl

e 4

to E

XT

ER

NA

L 1

or E

XT

ER

NA

L 3

.

éLo

ok fo

r th

e te

st s

igna

l of y

our

peri

pher

al in

the

sam

e w

ay a

s yo

u do

for

a vi

deo

reco

rder

.

Whe

n a

video

rec

orde

r is

conn

ecte

d to

EX

TE

RN

AL

1yo

u ca

n on

ly re

cord

apr

ogra

mm

e fro

m y

our T

V.O

nly

whe

n a

video

rec

orde

r is

conn

ecte

d to

EX

TE

RN

AL

2it

is po

ssib

le t

o re

cord

apr

ogra

mm

e fro

m y

our T

V as

wel

l as

from

oth

er c

onne

cted

equ

ipm

ent.

See

Reco

rdw

ith y

our

video

rec

orde

r,p.

26.

Not

e:EX

TERN

AL 1

can

hand

le C

VBS

and

RGB,

EXTE

RNAL

2CV

BS a

nd Y

/C a

nd R

GB,

EXTE

RNAL

3on

ly CV

BS.

Vid

eo r

eco

rder

VCR

1

CA

BL

E

1

4

2E

XT

.

2

3

VCR

1

CA

BL

E

12

1E

XT

ER

NA

L

24

5

3


25C

on

nec

t P

erip

her

al E

qu

ipm

ent

Sat

ellit

e re

ceiv

erPr

ess

the

OK

key

sim

ulta

neou

sly

with

the

dig

it ke

y 1.

Now

you

can

ope

rate

you

r sa

telli

te r

ecei

ver

with

the

rem

ote

cont

rol o

f you

rT

V.

Kee

p th

e M

OD

E k

ey o

n th

e le

ft s

ide

of t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l pre

ssed

and

sim

ulta

neou

sly

pres

s:

ME

NU

to s

witc

h th

e S

AT

men

u on

or

off

Thes

e ke

ys f

unct

ion

with

equ

ipm

ent

whi

ch u

se t

he R

C5 s

igna

lling

stan

dard

.

DV

D p

laye

rPr

ess

the

OK

sim

ulta

neou

sly

with

the

dig

it ke

y 2.

Now

you

can

ope

rate

you

r D

VD

pla

yer

with

the

rem

ote

cont

rol o

f you

r T

V.

Kee

p th

e M

OD

E k

ey o

n th

e le

ft s

ide

of t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l pre

ssed

and

sim

ulta

neou

sly

pres

s:

ME

NU

to s

witc

h th

e D

VD

men

u on

or

off

bto

sel

ect

a D

VD

titl

e

0to

sel

ect

a D

VD

chap

ter

Xto

sel

ect

your

cho

ice

of a

udio

lang

uage

Òto

sea

rch

dow

n

‡st

op

πpl

ay

†to

sea

rch

forw

ard

0-9

to s

elec

t a

prog

ram

me

num

ber

from

you

r D

VD

OK

to e

nter

the

sel

ecte

d m

enu

item

®,C

,f,h

,w h

ave

no fu

nctio

n

Not

e:af

ter

repl

acin

g th

e ba

tter

ies

the

defa

ult

oper

atio

nal e

quip

men

t is

the

sate

llite

rece

iver.

Thes

e ke

ys f

unct

ion

with

equ

ipm

ent

whi

ch u

se t

he R

C6 s

igna

lling

stan

dard

.

VP

SMA

RT

DN

R

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

Ò ‡ π †

X0b

MEN

U

yÚ

24C

on

nec

t P

erip

her

al E

qu

ipm

entIf

the

TV is

con

nect

ed t

o a

video

rec

orde

r w

ith t

he E

asyL

ink

func

tion,

in s

ome

case

sth

e TV

will

be s

witc

hed

on,e

ven

whe

n it

was

in s

tand

by.(

E.g.

play

back

tap

e,...)

This

is no

t po

ssib

le w

hen

Child

lock

On

is se

lect

ed.

Eq

uip

men

t co

nn

ecte

d w

ith

an

aer

ial

cabl

e o

nly

:Se

lect

the

pro

gram

me

num

ber

unde

r w

hich

you

hav

e st

ored

the

tes

t si

gnal

with

the

dig

it ke

ys.

Eq

uip

men

t co

nn

ecte

d t

o a

eu

roco

nn

ecto

r o

r to

th

e ri

ght

sid

e o

f th

e T

VPr

ess

the

wke

y re

peat

edly

to

sele

ct E

XT

1,E

XT

2,E

XT

3or

FR

ON

T,

acco

rdin

g to

whe

re y

ou c

onne

cted

you

r eq

uipm

ent

at t

he b

ack

or t

he r

ight

side

of y

our

TV.

Rem

ark

:Mos

t eq

uipm

ent

(dec

oder

,vid

eo r

ecor

der,

sate

llite

rece

iver)

car

ries

out

the

switc

hing

itse

lf.

If y

ou

wan

t to

ch

ange

to

TV

ch

ann

els?

Ente

r th

e pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

r of

the

TV

cha

nnel

whi

ch y

ou w

ant

to w

atch

with

the

dig

it ke

ys o

r pr

ess

the

wke

y re

peat

edly

to

sele

ct T

V.

To s

elec

t co

nn

ecte

d e

qu

ipm

ent

Mos

t of

the

aud

io a

nd v

ideo

equ

ipm

ent

from

our

ran

ge o

f pro

duct

s ca

n be

oper

ated

with

the

rem

ote

cont

rol o

f you

r T

V.

Vid

eo r

eco

rder

Kee

p th

e V

CR

key

on t

he le

ft s

ide

of t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l pre

ssed

and

sim

ulta

neou

sly

pres

s:

®fo

r re

cord

,

Òfo

r re

win

d,

‡fo

r st

op,

πfo

r pl

ay,

†fo

r fa

st fo

rwar

d,

◊fo

r se

lect

ing

1- o

r 2-

digi

t pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

rs fr

om t

he v

ideo

reco

rder

,

- P

+fo

r se

quen

tial p

rogr

amm

e se

lect

ion

from

the

vid

eo r

ecor

der

tune

r,

0 to

9to

sel

ect

a pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

r fr

om y

our

vide

o re

cord

er t

uner

,

Bto

sw

itch

the

vide

o re

cord

er t

o st

andb

y

Thes

e ke

ys f

unct

ion

with

equ

ipm

ent

whi

ch u

se t

he R

C5 s

igna

lling

stan

dard

.

If yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r ha

s th

e Ea

syLi

nk f

unct

ion,

the

key

INS

TA

NT

®fo

r re

cord

ing,

can

be o

pera

ted

in t

he T

V m

ode.

If yo

ur E

asyL

ink

video

rec

orde

r ha

s th

e sy

stem

sta

ndby

fun

ctio

n,w

hen

you

pres

s th

eB

key

for

3 se

cond

s,bo

th T

V an

d th

e vid

eo r

ecor

der

are

switc

hed

to s

tand

by.

Au

dio

an

d v

ideo

eq

uip

men

t ke

ys

w

SMA

RT

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

87

9

0i

0◊

VP

SMA

RT

DN

R

ACT

IVE

CON

TRO

L

Ma

w

h

qbS

X

21

3

54

6

87

9

0

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬

i0

fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

◊

INST

AN

TQ

B ◊® Ò ‡ π †

yÚ


27T

ips

& I

nd

ex

Car

e o

f th

e sc

reen

Cle

an t

he T

V w

ith a

slig

htly

dam

p so

ftcl

oth.

Do

not

use

abra

sive

sol

vent

as

itca

n da

mag

e th

e T

V s

cree

n.

Po

or

Pic

ture

•H

ave

you

sele

cted

the

cor

rect

TV

syst

em?

•Is

you

r T

V o

r ho

use

aeri

al lo

cate

d to

ocl

ose

to lo

udsp

eake

rs,n

on-e

arth

edau

dio

equi

pmen

t or

neo

n lig

hts,

etc.

?•

Mou

ntai

ns o

r hi

gh b

uild

ings

can

cau

sedo

uble

pic

ture

s or

gho

st im

ages

.So

met

imes

you

can

impr

ove

the

pict

ure

qual

ity b

y ch

angi

ng t

he d

irec

tion

of t

heae

rial

.•

Is t

he p

ictu

re o

r te

lete

xtun

reco

gnis

able

?C

heck

if y

ou h

ave

ente

red

the

corr

ect

freq

uenc

y.Se

e In

stal

latio

n,p.

5.•

Are

bri

ghtn

ess

and

cont

rast

out

of

adju

stm

ent?

Sel

ect

Fact

ory

sett

ings

inth

e Se

tup

men

u,p.

7.•

Som

etim

es p

oor

pict

ure

qual

ity is

poss

ible

whe

n ha

ving

act

ivat

ed a

n S-

VH

Sca

mer

a or

cam

cord

er c

onne

cted

to

the

righ

t si

de o

f you

r TV

and

ano

ther

peri

pher

al is

con

nect

ed t

o E

XT

1or

EX

T2

at t

he s

ame

time.

In t

his

case

switc

h of

f one

of t

he o

ther

per

iphe

rals

.

No

pic

ture

•Is

the

aer

ial c

onne

cted

pro

perl

y?

•A

re t

he p

lugs

tig

htly

con

nect

ed in

the

aeri

al s

ocke

t?•

Is t

he a

eria

l cab

le in

goo

d co

nditi

on a

nddo

es it

hav

e su

itabl

e pl

ugs?

•A

re t

he c

onne

ctio

n fa

cilit

ies

to a

pos

sibl

ese

cond

TV

in g

ood

cond

ition

?If i

n do

ubt,

cons

ult

your

dea

ler.

No

so

un

d•

No

soun

d on

any

cha

nnel

? C

heck

the

volu

me

isn’

t at

min

imum

.•

Is t

he s

ound

inte

rrup

ted

with

the

mut

eke

y ¬

?

Rem

ote

co

ntr

ol

If yo

ur T

Vno

long

er r

espo

nds

to t

here

mot

e co

ntro

l,th

e ba

tter

ies

may

be

dead

.Yo

u ca

n st

ill u

se t

he M

key

and

the

-/+

key

s at

the

top

of y

our

TV.

Men

uH

ave

you

sele

cted

the

wro

ng m

enu?

Pre

ssth

e M

EN

Uke

y ag

ain

to e

xit

from

the

men

u.

No

so

luti

on

Switc

h yo

ur T

V o

ff an

d th

en o

n ag

ain

once

.N

ever

att

emp

t to

rep

air

a d

efec

tive

TV

yo

urs

elf.

Che

ck w

ith y

our

deal

er o

r ca

ll a T

Vte

chni

cian

.

En

d o

f lif

e d

irec

tive

sPh

ilips

is p

ayin

g a

lot

of a

tten

tion

topr

oduc

e en

viro

nmen

tally

-fri

endl

y in

gre

enfo

cal a

reas

.You

r ne

w T

V c

onta

ins

mat

eria

lsw

hich

can

be

recy

cled

and

reu

sed.

At

the

end

of it

s lif

e sp

ecia

lised

com

pani

esca

n di

sman

tle t

he d

isca

rded

TV

to

conc

entr

ate

the

reus

able

mat

eria

ls a

nd t

om

inim

ise

the

amou

nt o

f mat

eria

ls t

o be

disp

osed

of.

Plea

se e

nsur

e yo

u di

spos

e of

you

r ol

d T

Vac

cord

ing

to lo

cal r

egul

atio

ns.

How

to

dis

po

se o

f b

atte

ries

?T

he b

atte

ries

sup

plie

d do

not

con

tain

the

heav

y m

etal

s m

ercu

ry a

nd c

adm

ium

.N

ever

thel

ess

in m

any

coun

trie

s ba

tter

ies

may

not

be

disp

osed

of w

ith y

our

hous

ehol

d w

aste

.Ple

ase

ensu

re y

ou d

ispo

seof

bat

teri

es a

ccor

ding

to

loca

l reg

ulat

ions

.

aA

CI,

5ac

tive

cont

rol,

10au

tom

atic

inst

alla

tion,

5au

to fo

rmat

,7

auto

sur

roun

d,8

AV

L,12

bbi

lingu

al b

road

cast

,10

cca

mco

rder

,23

child

lock

,13

cont

inuo

us s

ubtit

les,

21co

untr

y,4

dde

code

r/de

scra

mbl

er,

7de

lta v

olum

e,12

digi

tal o

ptio

ns,

11do

uble

line

s,11

dual

scr

een,

14D

VD

,25

dyna

mic

con

tras

t,11

eea

sy t

ext,

19eu

roca

ble,

22f

fact

ory

sett

ings

,7

favo

urite

pro

gram

mes

,6

free

ze,

10fr

eque

ncy,

5g

give

nam

e,6

grap

hic

equa

lizer

,12

hhe

adph

one,

23hu

e,11

iin

cred

ible

sur

roun

d,9

info

on

scre

en,

9in

form

atio

n lin

e,7

inte

rrup

t th

e so

und,

9l

lang

uage

,4

mm

anua

l ins

talla

tion,

5m

enu

lang

uage

,4

nna

tura

l mot

ion,

11N

EXT

VIE

W,

15ni

cam

,10

ppi

ctur

e ad

just

men

ts,

11pi

ctur

e fo

rmat

,10

pict

ure

tilt,

7pr

ogra

mm

e se

lect

ion,

9pr

ogra

mm

e lis

t,13

rre

cord

ing,

26

resh

uffle

,6

ssa

telli

te r

ecei

ver,

26se

arch

for

TV

cha

nnel

s,5

setu

p,7

slee

ptim

er,

13sm

art

pict

ure

and

soun

d,10

soun

d ad

just

men

ts,

12st

ereo

,10

stor

e T

V c

hann

els,

4su

bpag

es t

elet

ext,

20S-

VH

S,26

switc

h T

V o

n,3

tte

lete

xt,

19v

vide

o re

cord

er,

22V

irtu

al D

olby

Sur

roun

d,9

volu

me,

9

Tip

s

Ind

ex

26R

eco

rd

To r

ecor

d S-

VH

S qu

ality

,con

nect

an

S-V

HS

peri

pher

al d

irec

tly t

o th

e vi

deo

reco

rder

.

Rec

ord

a T

Vp

rogr

amm

e&

Sele

ct t

he p

rogr

amm

e nu

mbe

r on

you

r vi

deo

reco

rder

.

éSe

t yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r to

rec

ord.

See

the

hand

book

for

your

vid

eo r

ecor

der.

Switc

hing

pro

gram

me

num

bers

on

your

TV

does

not

dist

urb

reco

rdin

g !

Rec

ord

a p

rogr

amm

e o

n y

ou

r vi

deo

rec

ord

er c

on

nec

ted

to

EX

TE

RN

AL

2fr

om

Au

dio

/Vid

eo e

qu

ipm

ent

con

nec

ted

to

E

XT

ER

NA

L 1

,EX

TE

RN

AL

3o

r to

so

cket

s o

n t

he

righ

t si

de

of

the

TV

&Sw

itch

on t

he e

quip

men

t.

éSe

lect

the

rig

ht e

xter

nal o

n yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r.

“Se

t yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r to

rec

ord.

You

reco

rd w

hat

you

are

wat

chin

g on

the

scr

een.

Do

not

switc

h pr

ogra

mm

e nu

mbe

rs o

r do

not

sw

itch

off

your

TV

whe

n yo

u ar

ere

cord

ing

!

Rec

ord

wit

h y

ou

r vi

deo

rec

ord

er

If yo

u ha

ve c

onne

cted

an

S-VH

S vid

eo r

ecor

der

prov

ided

with

the

Eas

yLin

k fu

nctio

n,yo

u ca

n re

cord

S-V

HS-

qual

ity f

rom

an

S-VH

S pe

riphe

ral c

onne

cted

to

the

right

sid

eof

the

TV.

(E.g

.fro

m a

n S-

VHS

cam

cord

er.)

In T

V m

ode,

it is

poss

ible

to

star

t a

dire

ct r

ecor

ding

of

the

prog

ram

me

whi

ch is

bei

ngdi

spla

yed

on t

he T

V sc

reen

.Pr

ess

the

INS

TA

NT

® r

ecor

d ke

y of

the

rem

ote

cont

rol.

The

video

rec

orde

r sw

itche

s on

fro

m s

tand

by a

nd a

mes

sage

of

wha

t is

bein

gre

cord

ed a

ppea

rs o

n th

e sc

reen

.Th

e vid

eo r

ecor

der

star

ts r

ecor

ding

the

pro

gram

me

you

are

wat

chin

g.Sw

itchi

ng p

rogr

amm

e nu

mbe

rs o

n yo

ur T

V do

es n

ot d

istur

b re

cord

ing

!

Whe

n re

cord

ing

a pr

ogra

mm

e fro

m a

per

iphe

ral c

onne

cted

to

EXTE

RNAL

1,3

orFR

ON

T,yo

u ca

n no

t se

lect

ano

ther

TV

prog

ram

me

on t

he s

cree

n.To

wat

ch T

V pr

ogra

mm

es a

gain

,pre

ss t

he p

rogr

amm

e nu

mbe

r yo

u w

ant

to s

elec

ttw

ice.

Atte

ntio

n:th

e re

cord

ing

is st

oppe

d an

d yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r sw

itche

s to

sta

ndby

.

Rec

ord

wit

h y

ou

r vi

deo

rec

ord

er w

ith

Eas

yLin

k

If yo

ur v

ideo

rec

orde

r is

equi

pped

with

NEX

TVIE

WLi

nk,a

nd y

ou t

agge

d on

e or

mor

epr

ogra

mm

es t

o be

rec

orde

d au

tom

atic

ally

in t

he N

EXTV

IEW

mod

e,it

is no

t ne

cess

ary

for

the

TV t

o be

in t

he s

tand

by m

ode

or s

witc

hed

on fo

r th

e re

cord

ing

to s

tart

.

Rec

ord

wit

h y

ou

r vi

deo

rec

ord

er w

ith

NE

XT

VIE

WL

ink

VP

B

®Ò

‡π

†

¬fh

U

æ

MEN

U

b

OK

INST

AN

TQ

INST

AN

T

®y

Ú


Tab

le o

f T

V f

req

uen

cies

.F

req

uen

ztab

elle

der

Fer

nse

hse

nd

er.

Lis

te d

es f

réq

uen

ces

des

ém

ette

urs

.F

req

uen

tiet

abel

TV

-Zen

der

s.Ta

bel

la d

elle

fre

qu

enze

del

le t

rasm

itte

nti

.L

ista

de

las

frec

uen

cias

de

las

emis

ora

s.L

ista

das

fre

qu

ênci

as d

os

emis

sore

s.L

iste

ove

r T

V s

end

ern

e.Ta

bel

l ove

r T

V-f

rekv

ense

r.

GB

The

freq

uenc

ies

used

by

a ca

ble

com

pany

may

diff

erfr

om th

e fr

eque

ncie

s on

the

tabl

e. C

onsu

lt yo

ur c

able

com

pany

or

your

dea

ler

for

deta

iled

info

rmat

ion.

D In K

abel

fern

seha

nlag

en k

önne

n A

bwei

chun

gen

von

den

in d

en F

requ

enzt

abel

len

aufg

efüh

rten

Fre

quen

zen

vo

rko

mm

en

. B

itte

we

nd

en

Sie

sic

h a

n I

hre

nF

achh

ändl

er o

der

Ihre

Kab

elfe

rnse

hges

ells

chaf

t, di

eIh

nen

die

zutr

effe

nden

Fre

quen

zen

mitt

eilt.

F Le

s f

réq

ue

nc

es

uti

lis

ée

s p

ar

un

e s

oc

iété

de

télé

dist

ribut

ion

peuv

ent ê

tre

diffé

rent

es d

e ce

lles

sur

la l

iste

des

fré

quen

ces.

Con

sulte

z vo

tre

soci

été

deté

léd

istr

ibu

tio

n o

u v

otr

e r

ev

en

de

ur

po

ur

de

sin

form

atio

ns p

lus

déta

ilées

.

NL

De

fre

qu

en

tie

s d

ie g

eb

ruik

t w

ord

en

do

or

ee

nka

belm

aats

chap

pij

kunn

en v

ersc

hille

n va

n de

ze o

pd

e t

ab

el.

Ra

ad

ple

eg

uw

ka

be

lexp

loit

an

t o

f u

wha

ndel

aar

voor

mee

r in

form

atie

.

I Le fr

eque

nze

usat

e pe

r una

soc

ietà

di t

eled

istri

buzi

one

po

ssa

no

ess

ere

diff

ere

nti

di

qu

elle

ne

lla t

ab

ella

.C

onsu

ltate

la

soci

età

di t

eled

istr

ibuz

ione

o i

l vo

stro

riven

dito

re p

er in

form

azio

ne s

peci

fica.

E La

s fr

ecu

en

cia

s u

tiliz

ad

as

po

r la

s e

mp

resa

s d

edi

strib

ució

n de

señ

al p

or c

able

, pue

den

ser

dife

rent

esde

las

que

se e

ncue

ntra

n en

est

a ta

bla.

Con

sulte

con

su c

ompa

ñia

de

dist

ribuc

ión

de te

levi

sión

por

cab

le o

con

su

dis

trib

uid

or

pa

ra q

ue

le

pro

po

rcio

ne

n u

na

info

rmac

ión

más

det

alla

da.

P As

fre

qu

ên

cia

s u

tiliz

ad

as

po

r u

ma

so

cie

da

de

de

tele

dist

ribui

ção

pode

m s

er d

ifere

ntes

das

indi

cada

s na

lista

de

fre

qu

ên

cia

s. C

on

sult

ar

a s

oci

ed

ad

e d

ete

ledi

strib

uiçã

o ou

o v

ende

dor

para

info

rmaç

ões

mai

sde

talh

adas

.

DK

Fre

kven

ser

beny

ttet

af

kabe

l op

erat

øre

r ka

n væ

reaf

vige

nde

fra

diss

e, k

anta

kt d

eres

kab

el o

pera

tør

elle

rfo

rhan

dler

for

næm

ere

info

rma-

tion.

N Fre

kven

sene

som

ben

ytte

s pa

et k

abel

nett

kan

avvi

kefr

a de

som

er

oppf

ört i

tabe

llen.

Kon

takt

ditt

kab

el-T

Vse

lska

p el

ler

din

forh

andl

er fo

r næ

mer

e op

plys

ning

er.

S Fre

kve

nse

rna

so

m a

nvä

nd

s i

kab

el-

TV

-nä

ten

ka

nav

vika

från

frek

vens

erna

i ta

belle

n. K

onta

kta

ditt

kabe

l-T

V-b

olag

elle

r di

n ra

dioh

andl

are

för

vida

re in

form

atio

n.

SF

Kaa

peliy

htiö

den

käyt

täm

ät t

aaju

udet

voi

vat

poik

eta

taul

ukos

sa o

levi

sta

taaj

uuks

ista

. Ta

rkat

tie

dot

saat

kaap

eliy

htiö

sta

tai m

yyjä

ltä.

GR

�ι

συ�ν

�τητ

ες

π�υ

�ρησ

ιµ�π

�ι�ύ

νται

απ

� µι

α ετ

αιρε

ίατη

λεµε

τάδ�

σης

είναι

δυν

ατ�ν

να

είναι

δια

��ρε

τικές

απ�

αυτ

έςπ�

υ πε

ριέ�

ει �

κατά

λ�γ�

ς.(Σ

υµ��

υλευ

θείτε

την

ετα

ιρεία

τηλε

µετά

δ�ση

ς ή τ�

ν πω

λητή

για

λεπτ

�µερ

έστε

ρες π

ληρ�

��ρί

ες).

CE

IH

asto

ty n

a ko

tory

x pe

red

aòt

tela

kam

pani

ä m

ogut

otli

hatæ

sä o

t ha

stot

na

dann

oj t

abli

ce. (

Obr

atit

æsä

k V

aπej

tel

ekam

pani

i il

i V

aπem

u pr

odav

cu

zad

opol

nite

læno

j in

for

mac

iej.

H Egy

te

levi

zió−

adóá

llom

ás

sugá

rzás

hoz

hasz

nált

frek

venc

iata

rtom

ánya

i le

hetn

ek

a tá

bláz

atba

nkö

zölte

ktől

elté

rőek

is.

(A

bban

az

eset

ben,

ha

bőve

bbin

form

áció

kra

van

szük

sége

, for

duljo

n az

ela

dóho

z.)

PL

Ope

rato

r si

eci

tele

wiz

yjne

j m

oże

stos

ować

in

necz

ęsto

tliw

ości

, ni

ż te

, kt

óre

figu

rują

na

ta

blic

y(b

ardz

iej

szcz

egół

owyc

h in

form

acji

na

ten

tem

atza

sięg

nąć

u op

erat

ora

lub

sprz

edaw

cy).

CZ

Frek

venc

e po

užív

ané

někt

erým

i tel

eviz

ním

i spo

lečn

ost−

mi s

e m

ohou

liši

t od

údaj

ů uv

eden

ých

v to

mto

sez

nam

u.In

form

ujte

se b

líže

u př

íslu

šné

spol

ečno

sti n

ebo

v pr

ode−

jně,

kde

jste

tele

vizo

r ko

upili

.

SK

Fre

kven

cie

použ

ívan

é ni

ekto

rým

i sp

oloč

nos9

ami

tele

vízn

eho

pren

osu

sa m

ôžu

liši9

od ú

dajo

v uv

eden

ých

vto

mto

zo

znam

e.

Info

rmuj

te

sa

bliž

šie

u pr

íslu

šnej

spol

očno

sti a

lebo

v p

reda

jni,

kde

ste

tele

vízo

r kú

pili.

Tab

ell ö

ver

TV

-fre

kven

ser.

TV

-taa

juu

stau

lukk

o.

Kα

τάλ�

γ�ς

συ�ν

�τή

των

π�µ

πώ

ν.S

pi

sok

has

tot

per

edat

hi

kov

.A

tel

eviz

ió−

adóá

llom

ások

fre

kven

ciái

nak

a lis

tája

.L

ista

czę

stot

liwoś

ci s

tacj

i nad

awcz

ych.

Sezn

am f

rekv

enčn

ích

páse

m v

ysíla

čů.

Zoz

nam

fre

kven

čnýc

h pá

siem

vys

iela

čov.

EU

RO

PE

CH

AN

NE

L....

..FR

EQ

(M

Hz)

E2

......

......

......

..48.

25E

3...

......

......

.....5

5.25

E4

......

......

......

..62.

25E

5...

......

......

...17

5.25

E6

......

......

......

182.

25E

7...

......

......

...18

9.25

E8

......

......

......

196.

25E

9...

......

......

...20

3.25

E10

......

......

....2

10.2

5E

11...

......

......

.217

.25

E12

......

......

....2

24.2

5S

1....

......

......

..105

.25

S2.

......

......

.....1

12.2

5S

3....

......

......

..119

.25

S4.

......

......

.....1

26.2

5S

5....

......

......

..133

.25

S6.

......

......

.....1

40.2

5S

7....

......

......

..147

.25

S8.

......

......

.....1

54.2

5S

9....

......

......

..161

.25

S10

......

......

....1

68.2

5S

11...

......

......

.231

.25

S12

......

......

....2

38.2

5S

13...

......

......

.245

.25

S14

......

......

....2

52.2

5S

15...

......

......

.259

.25

S16

......

......

....2

66.2

5S

17...

......

......

.273

.25

S18

......

......

....2

80.2

5S

19...

......

......

.287

.25

S20

......

......

....2

94.2

5H

1...

......

......

..303

.25

H2

......

......

.....3

11.2

5H

3...

......

......

..319

.25

H4

......

......

.....3

27.2

5H

5...

......

......

..335

.25

H6

......

......

.....3

43.2

5H

7...

......

......

..351

.25

H8

......

......

.....3

59.2

5H

9...

......

......

..367

.25

H10

......

......

...37

5.25

H11

......

......

...38

3.25

H12

......

......

...39

1.25

H13

......

......

...39

9.25

H14

......

......

...40

7.25

H15

......

......

...41

5.25

H16

......

......

...42

3.25

H17

......

......

...43

1.25

H18

......

......

...43

9.25

H19

......

......

...44

7.25

21...

......

......

...47

1.25

22...

......

......

...47

9.25

23...

......

......

...48

7.25

24...

......

......

...49

5.25

25...

......

......

...50

3.25

26...

......

......

...51

1.25

27...

......

......

...51

9.25

28...

......

......

...52

7.25

29...

......

......

...53

5.25

30...

......

......

...54

3.25

31...

......

......

...55

1.25

32...

......

......

...55

9.25

33...

......

......

...56

7.25

34...

......

......

...57

5.25

35...

......

......

...58

3.25

36...

......

......

...59

1.25

37...

......

......

...59

9.25

38...

......

......

...60

7.25

39...

......

......

...61

5.25

40...

......

......

...62

3.25

41...

......

......

...63

1.25

42...

......

......

...63

9.25

43...

......

......

...64

7.25

44...

......

......

...65

5.25

45...

......

......

...66

3.25

46...

......

......

...67

1.25

47...

......

......

...67

9.25

48...

......

......

...68

7.25

49...

......

......

...69

5.25

50...

......

......

...70

3.25

51...

......

......

...71

1.25

52...

......

......

...71

9.25

53...

......

......

...72

7.25

54...

......

......

...73

5.25

55...

......

......

...74

3.25

56...

......

......

...75

1.25

57...

......

......

...75

9.25

58...

......

......

...76

7.25

59...

......

......

...77

5.25

60...

......

......

...78

3.25

61...

......

......

...79

1.25

62...

......

......

...79

9.25

63...

......

......

...80

7.25

64...

......

......

...81

5.25

65...

......

......

...82

3.25

66...

......

......

...83

1.25

67...

......

......

...83

9.25

68...

......

......

...84

7.25

69...

......

......

...85

5.25

ITA

LYC

AN

ALE

......

..FR

EQ

(M

Hz)

A...

......

......

......

53.7

5B

......

......

......

....6

2.25

C...

......

......

......

.82.

25D

......

......

......

.175

.25

E...

......

......

.....1

83.7

5F

......

......

......

..192

.25

G...

......

......

....2

01.2

5H

......

......

......

.210

.25

H1

......

......

.....2

17.2

5S

1....

......

......

..105

.25

S2.

......

......

.....1

12.2

5S

3....

......

......

..119

.25

S4.

......

......

.....1

26.2

5S

5....

......

......

..133

.25

S6.

......

......

.....1

40.2

5S

7....

......

......

..147

.25

S8.

......

......

.....1

54.2

5S

9....

......

......

..161

.25

S10

......

......

....1

68.2

5S

11...

......

......

.231

.25

S12

......

......

....2

38.2

5S

13...

......

......

.245

.25

S14

......

......

....2

52.2

5S

15...

......

......

.259

.25

S16

......

......

....2

66.2

5S

17...

......

......

.273

.25

S18

......

......

....2

80.2

5S

19...

......

......

.287

.25

S20

......

......

....2

94.2

5H

1...

......

......

..303

.25

H2

......

......

.....3

11.2

5H

3...

......

......

..319

.25

H4

......

......

.....3

27.2

5H

5...

......

......

..335

.25

H6

......

......

.....3

43.2

5H

7...

......

......

..351

.25

H8

......

......

.....3

59.2

5H

9...

......

......

..367

.25

H10

......

......

...37

5.25

H11

......

......

...38

3.25

H12

......

......

...39

1.25

H13

......

......

...39

9.25

H14

......

......

...40

7.25

H15

......

......

...41

5.25

H16

......

......

...42

3.25

H17

......

......

...43

1.25

H18

......

......

...43

9.25

H19

......

......

...44

7.25

21...

......

......

...47

1.25

22...

......

......

...47

9.25

23...

......

......

...48

7.25

24...

......

......

...49

5.25

25...

......

......

...50

3.25

26...

......

......

...51

1.25

27...

......

......

...51

9.25

28...

......

......

...52

7.25

29...

......

......

...53

5.25

30...

......

......

...54

3.25

31...

......

......

...55

1.25

32...

......

......

...55

9.25

33...

......

......

...56

7.25

34...

......

......

...57

5.25

35...

......

......

...58

3.25

36...

......

......

...59

1.25

37...

......

......

...59

9.25

38...

......

......

...60

7.25

39...

......

......

...61

5.25

40...

......

......

...62

3.25

41...

......

......

...63

1.25

42...

......

......

...63

9.25

43...

......

......

...64

7.25

44...

......

......

...65

5.25

45...

......

......

...66

3.25

46...

......

......

...67

1.25

47...

......

......

...67

9.25

48...

......

......

...68

7.25

49...

......

......

...69

5.25

50...

......

......

...70

3.25

51...

......

......

...71

1.25

52...

......

......

...71

9.25

53...

......

......

...72

7.25

54...

......

......

...73

5.25

55...

......

......

...74

3.25

56...

......

......

...75

1.25

57...

......

......

...75

9.25

58...

......

......

...76

7.25

59...

......

......

...77

5.25

60...

......

......

...78

3.25

61...

......

......

...79

1.25

62...

......

......

...79

9.25

63...

......

......

...80

7.25

64...

......

......

...81

5.25

65...

......

......

...82

3.25

66...

......

......

...83

1.25

67...

......

......

...83

9.25

68...

......

......

...84

7.25

69...

......

......

...85

5.25

FR

AN

CE

CA

NA

L....

......

.FR

EQ

(M

Hz)

2...

......

......

......

.55.

753

......

......

......

....6

0.50

4...

......

......

......

.63.

755

......

......

......

....1

76.0

6...

......

......

......

.184

.07

......

......

......

....1

92.0

8...

......

......

......

.200

.09

......

......

......

....2

08.0

10...

......

......

.....2

16.0

B...

......

......

.....1

16.7

5C

......

......

......

..128

.75

D...

......

......

....1

40.7

5E

......

......

......

..159

.75

F...

......

......

.....1

64.7

5G

......

......

......

.176

.75

H...

......

......

....1

88.7

5I.

......

......

......

..200

.75

J...

......

......

.....2

12.7

5K

......

......

......

..224

.75

L...

......

......

.....2

36.7

5M

......

......

......

.248

.75

N...

......

......

....2

60.7

5O

......

......

......

.272

.75

P...

......

......

.....2

84.7

5Q

......

......

......

.296

.75

H1

......

......

.....3

03.2

5H

2...

......

......

..311

.25

H3

......

......

.....3

19.2

5H

4...

......

......

..327

.25

H5

......

......

.....3

35.2

5H

6...

......

......

..343

.25

H7

......

......

.....3

51.2

5H

8...

......

......

..359

.25

H9

......

......

.....3

67.2

5H

10...

......

......

375.

25H

11...

......

......

383.

25H

12...

......

......

391.

25H

13...

......

......

399.

25H

14...

......

......

407.

25H

15...

......

......

415.

25H

16...

......

......

423.

25H

17...

......

......

431.

25H

18...

......

......

439.

25H

19...

......

......

447.

2521

......

......

......

471.

2522

......

......

......

479.

2523

......

......

......

487.

2524

......

......

......

495.

2525

......

......

......

503.

2526

......

......

......

511.

2527

......

......

......

519.

2528

......

......

......

527.

2529

......

......

......

535.

2530

......

......

......

543.

2531

......

......

......

551.

2532

......

......

......

559.

2533

......

......

......

567.

2534

......

......

......

575.

2535

......

......

......

583.

2536

......

......

......

591.

2537

......

......

......

599.

2538

......

......

......

607.

2539

......

......

......

615.

2540

......

......

......

623.

2541

......

......

......

631.

2542

......

......

......

639.

2543

......

......

......

647.

2544

......

......

......

655.

2545

......

......

......

663.

2546

......

......

......

671.

2547

......

......

......

679.

2548

......

......

......

687.

2549

......

......

......

695.

2550

......

......

......

703.

2551

......

......

......

711.

2552

......

......

......

719.

2553

......

......

......

727.

2554

......

......

......

735.

2555

......

......

......

743.

2556

......

......

......

751.

2557

......

......

......

759.

2558

......

......

......

767.

2559

......

......

......

775.

2560

......

......

......

783.

2561

......

......

......

791.

2562

......

......

......

799.

2563

......

......

......

807.

2564

......

......

......

815.

2565

......

......

......

823.

2566

......

......

......

831.

2567

......

......

......

839.

2568

......

......

......

847.

2569

......

......

......

855.

25

EA

ST

ER

N E

UR

OP

EC

AN

AL.

......

....F

RE

Q (

MH

z)R

1....

......

......

....4

9.75

R2.

......

......

......

.59.

25R

3....

......

......

....7

7.25

R4.

......

......

......

.85.

25R

5....

......

......

....9

3.25

R 6

......

......

.....1

75.2

5R

7...

......

......

..183

.25

R 8

......

......

.....1

91.2

5R

9...

......

......

..199

.25

R10

......

......

....2

07.2

5R

11...

......

......

.215

.25

R12

......

......

....2

23.2

5S

1....

......

......

..105

.25

S2.

......

......

.....1

12.2

5S

3....

......

......

..119

.25

S4.

......

......

.....1

26.2

5S

5....

......

......

..133

.25

S6.

......

......

.....1

40.2

5S

7....

......

......

..147

.25

S8.

......

......

.....1

54.2

5S

9....

......

......

..161

.25

S10

......

......

....1

68.2

5S

11...

......

......

.231

.25

S12

......

......

....2

38.2

5S

13...

......

......

.245

.25

S14

......

......

....2

52.2

5S

15...

......

......

.259

.25

S16

......

......

....2

66.2

5S

17...

......

......

.273

.25

S18

......

......

....2

80.2

5S

19...

......

......

.287

.25

S20

......

......

....2

94.2

5H

1...

......

......

..303

.25

H2

......

......

.....3

11.2

5H

3...

......

......

..319

.25

H4

......

......

.....3

27.2

5H

5...

......

......

..335

.25

H6

......

......

.....3

43.2

5H

7...

......

......

..351

.25

H8

......

......

.....3

59.2

5H

9...

......

......

..367

.25

H10

......

......

...37

5.25

H11

......

......

...38

3.25

H12

......

......

...39

1.25

H13

......

......

...39

9.25

H14

......

......

...40

7.25

H15

......

......

...41

5.25

H16

......

......

...42

3.25

H17

......

......

...43

1.25

H18

......

......

...43

9.25

H19

......

......

...44

7.25

21...

......

......

...47

1.25

22...

......

......

...47

9.25

23...

......

......

...48

7.25

24...

......

......

...49

5.25

25...

......

......

...50

3.25

26...

......

......

...51

1.25

27...

......

......

...51

9.25

28...

......

......

...52

7.25

29...

......

......

...53

5.25

30...

......

......

...54

3.25

31...

......

......

...55

1.25

32...

......

......

...55

9.25

33...

......

......

...56

7.25

34...

......

......

...57

5.25

35...

......

......

...58

3.25

36...

......

......

...59

1.25

37...

......

......

...59

9.25

38...

......

......

...60

7.25

39...

......

......

...61

5.25

40...

......

......

...62

3.25

41...

......

......

...63

1.25

42...

......

......

...63

9.25

43...

......

......

...64

7.25

44...

......

......

...65

5.25

45...

......

......

...66

3.25

46...

......

......

...67

1.25

47...

......

......

...67

9.25

48...

......

......

...68

7.25

49...

......

......

...69

5.25

50...

......

......

...70

3.25

51...

......

......

...71

1.25

52...

......

......

...71

9.25

53...

......

......

...72

7.25

54...

......

......

...73

5.25

55...

......

......

...74

3.25

56...

......

......

...75

1.25

57...

......

......

...75

9.25

58...

......

......

...76

7.25

59...

......

......

...77

5.25

60...

......

......

...78

3.25

61...

......

......

...79

1.25

62...

......

......

...79

9.25

63...

......

......

...80

7.25

64...

......

......

...81

5.25

65...

......

......

...82

3.25

66...

......

......

...83

1.25

67...

......

......

...83

9.25

68...

......

......

...84

7.25

69...

......

......

...85

5.25

28G

loss

ary

100

Hz

100

Her

tz p

rovi

des

a su

peri

or s

olut

ion

toth

e pr

oble

m o

f pic

ture

flic

ker

whi

ch is

part

icul

arly

not

icea

ble

with

larg

er s

cree

nsi

zes.

In a

con

vent

iona

l TV,

the

pict

ure

area

is s

cann

ed 5

0 tim

es a

sec

ond

(50

Her

tz)

–a

freq

uenc

y w

hich

is s

till d

etec

tabl

e by

the

hum

an e

ye in

the

form

of a

flic

keri

ngpi

ctur

e.In

100

Her

tz s

ets,

the

pict

ure

area

is s

cann

ed a

t a

rate

of 1

00 t

imes

per

seco

nd (

100

Her

tz).

At

this

freq

uenc

y,th

eey

e ca

nnot

det

ect

flick

er,r

esul

ting

in a

clea

rer

pict

ure

whi

ch is

mor

e re

laxi

ng t

oth

e ey

e.

Aut

omat

ic C

hann

el I

nsta

llati

on(A

CI)

Aut

omat

ical

ly in

stal

ls a

ll T

V c

hann

els

inth

e sa

me

orde

r as

offe

red

by y

our

cabl

eco

mpa

ny,p

rovi

ded

of c

ours

e th

at t

he d

ata

is t

rans

mitt

ed.I

t al

so a

utom

atic

ally

incl

udes

pro

gram

me

num

ber

and

prog

ram

me

nam

e.W

ith A

CI,

chan

nel i

nsta

llatio

n is

fully

auto

mat

ic,s

impl

e an

d fa

st.

Chi

ld lo

ckFe

atur

e to

pre

vent

una

utho

rise

d us

e of

your

TV.

Dig

ital

Sca

nIf

you

look

at

a te

levi

sion

scr

een

you

will

see

smal

l im

perf

ectio

ns in

the

pic

ture

caus

ed b

y lin

e vi

brat

ion.

Dig

ital S

can

(an

inte

rnal

pro

cess

) re

mov

es in

terl

ine

flick

er.

Whe

n co

mbi

ned

with

100

Hz,

you

will

see

a to

tally

sta

ble

imag

e.

Eas

y L

ink

Dig

ital ‘

inte

llige

nt’ E

SI b

us-s

yste

m b

etw

een

TV

and

VC

R (

Scar

t co

nnec

tion

requ

ired

).Tu

rns

sour

ce s

elec

tion

and

cont

rol i

nto

aon

e-bu

tton

ope

ratio

n.

Eas

y Te

xtTe

lete

xt m

emor

y th

at a

utom

atic

ally

mem

oris

es T

elet

ext

page

s an

d gi

ves

you

inst

ant

acce

ss t

o th

em.

Eur

ocon

nect

orA

21-

pin

conn

ecto

r sy

stem

ena

blin

g yo

uto

sim

ply

conn

ect

vari

ous

type

s of

audi

o/vi

deo

and

com

pute

r eq

uipm

ent.

Men

uO

n-sc

reen

dis

play

of f

unct

ions

and

faci

litie

s in

a w

ell-o

rgan

ised

sur

vey,

whi

chyo

u ca

n se

lect

usi

ng y

our

rem

ote

cont

rol.

NE

XT

VIE

W

NEX

TV

IEW

is a

new

feat

ure

to a

ssis

t th

e T

Van

d V

CR

use

r in

sel

ectin

g th

e pr

ogra

mm

essh

e or

he

likes

to

wat

ch fr

om a

tel

evis

ion

prog

ram

me

guid

e on

the

scr

een.

It e

nabl

esth

e us

er t

o se

e a

desc

ript

ion

of e

very

prog

ram

me,

and

mar

k in

tere

stin

gpr

ogra

mm

es t

o be

rem

inde

d (a

uto

TV

on)

or r

ecor

ded

(NEX

TV

IEW

Link

vid

eore

cord

er r

equi

red)

.

NT

SCT

he b

road

cast

ing

syst

em u

sed

in t

he U

SA,

Japa

n an

d pa

rts

of S

outh

Am

eric

a an

dSo

uthe

ast-

Asi

a.

Smar

t P

ictu

re a

nd S

ound

con

trol

sK

eys

on t

he r

emot

e co

ntro

l to

sele

ctpr

edef

ined

pic

ture

and

sou

nd s

ettin

gs.

Slee

ptim

erFu

nctio

n w

ith w

hich

you

can

set

a t

ime

peri

od a

fter

whi

ch t

he T

V s

houl

d sw

itch

itsel

f to

stan

dby.

Pic

ture

Fre

eze

TV

mod

e w

hich

allo

ws

you

to “

free

ze”

ace

rtai

n im

age

in o

rder

to

stud

y a

spec

ific

deta

il at

eas

e,e.

g.to

mak

e no

tes

of c

erta

inpr

ogra

mm

e in

form

atio

n lik

e ph

one

num

bers

.

Tele

text

See

also

Eas

y Te

xtW

ST:W

orld

Sta

ndar

d Te

lete

xt.

FLO

F:Fu

ll Le

vel o

ne F

eatu

res.

Syst

emap

plie

d by

the

BBC

,RV

E....

that

pro

vide

s a

fast

acc

ess

to t

he t

elet

ext

page

s.TO

P:Ta

ble

of (

Tele

text

) Pa

ges.

Ger

man

syst

em fo

r an

eas

y ac

cess

to

the

tele

text

page

s.

Tin

t

TV-

func

tion

to m

odify

the

gen

eral

col

our

bala

nce

betw

een

cool

and

war

m a

nd t

oad

just

it a

ccor

ding

to

your

per

sona

lpr

efer

ence

.

Glo

ssar

y

Mechanical InstructionsGB 20 EM3E4.

4. Mechanical Instructions

Note: Figures below can deviate slightly from the actualsituation, due to the different set executions.

4.1 Access to the Service Connector (forComPair)

1. Remove the 'Service Connector' cover (see Figure 4.1).2. Connect the ComPair cable (for more info, see chapter

5).3. Start ComPair and perform the diagnosis.

4.2 Rear Cover Removal

1. Remove all fixation screws [A] of the rear cover.2. Use a knife (or other thin blade) to release the four

fixation clamps [B] at the top of the TV-set. Press downuntil you here a click.

3. Now remove the rear cover.

Figure 4-1 .eps

4.3 Print Removal

4.3.1 Large Signal Panel (LSP)

Service position 1: For better accessibility of the LSP, do thefollowing (see Figure 4.2):1. Remove the LSP-bracket from the bottom tray by pulling

it backwards.2. Hook the bracket in the first row of fixation holes of the

bottom tray. In other words, reposition the bracket from[1] to [2].

Figure 4-2 .eps

Service position 2: To get access to the bottom side (solderside) of the LSP, do the following (see Figure 4.3):1. To disconnect the degaussing coil from the LSP, remove

the cable from connector 1502 [1].2. Release the wiring from their fixation clamps, in order to

get room for repositioning the LSP.3. Flip the LSP 90 degrees clockwise [2], and place it in the

fixation hole at the left side of the bottom tray [3].

Figure 4-3 .eps

4.3.2 3rd SCART Panel

To remove the 3rd SCART module, do the following:1. Remove the fixation screw [1].2. To release the fixation peg, push it towards the CRT [2].3. At the same time, pull the complete module away from

the LSP [3]. It hinges in the LSP-bracket.4. To remove the panel, disconnect the flat-cable from

connector 1680 and remove the four panel screws [4].

Figure 4-4 .eps

CL16532044_005.eps090501

A

A

A Aservice

connectorcover

A

A

A

B B B B

AUDIO OUT

SURR.

L

R

A

A

A

CL 16532044_003.eps100501

Bottom tray2

1

1

LSP

LOT - bracket

SSB

SSB - bracket

2

CL 16532044_006.eps140501

3

4

1

1502

2

CL 16532044_010.eps140501

1

3

4 4

1680

2

Mechanical Instructions GB 21EM3E 4.

4.3.3 Small Signal Board (SSB)

In fact, there is no predefined service position for the SSB.Most test points are located on the A-side (side that is facingthe tuner).If you have to replace ICs, you must take the complete SSBmodule out of the SIMM-connector.

To get access to the SSB test points, do the following:1. Put the LSP in service position 1 (as described above).2. Remove the fixation screw, which holds the SSB-bracket

[1].3. Release the clamping jaw at the top of the SSB bracket

[2] and [3].4. Push the two clamping lugs outwards, and pull the top of

the bracket at the same time upwards [4] and [5].5. Now you can remove the complete bracket. Push it, at

the height of the LSP-bracket, towards the CRT [6] andlift it out of the LSP-bracket [7].

Figure 4-5 .eps

1. Push the top of the SSB towards the LOT [1].2. Due to the pressure, the two metal clamps at both sides

of the SIMM-connector will release [2].3. Take the complete SSB out [3].

Figure 4-6 .eps

1. Once you have taken out the SSB, remove the A-sideshielding [2]. Sometimes it is necessary to unsoldersome solder-tags first [1].

2. Now replace the SSB module in the SIMM-connector inreverse order.

Figure 4-7

Note 1: For better access to the SSB, it is possible to orderan ‘extension board’ under number 9965 000 07933.Note 2: If necessary for the measurement, put the LSP in'service position 2' (as described above).

4.3.4 Top Control Panel

1. Remove the two fixation screws.2. Pull the board backward.

Figure 4-8

4.3.5 Side I/O Panel

1. Remove the two fixation screws [1].2. Push the panel door inside and fix it in the lock [2].3. Pull the module backward [3].4. Now release the fixation clamps, in order to remove the

print from its bracket.

Figure 4-9 .eps

CL 16532044_027.eps160501

37

6

7

6

4

4

2

1

5

3

2

1

SSB

2

3

CL 16532044_007.eps090501

2

CL 16532044_008.eps090501

21

1

SAM (4005)

SDM (4006)

CL96532137_009.eps101199

Top control board

CL 16532044_009.eps090501

1

31

2

Mechanical InstructionsGB 22 EM3E4.

4.3.6 DAF Panel

1. Remove the fixation screw [1].2. Push down the fixation clamp [2], and pull the complete

bracket at the same time away from the CRT [3]. Themodule is now free from the LSP-bracket.

3. Release the fixation clamps [4], in order to remove theprint from its bracket.

Figure 4-10 .eps

4.3.7 Mains Switch / LED Panel

1. Release the two fixation clamps by pushing them upward[1].

2. At the same time, pull the complete assy backward [2].3. Now release the two fixation clamps [3], in order to

remove the print from its bracket [4].

Figure 4-11 .eps

Note: If necessary, you can replace the light guide.

4.4 Rear Cover Assembly

Before you re-assemble the rear cover, perform the followingchecks:• Check whether the mains cord is mounted correctly in

the guiding brackets.• Check whether all cables are placed in fixation clamps.

This is very important due to the large 'hot' area of theset.

CL 16532044_011.eps150501

4

1

3

4

3

2

CL 16532044_012.eps090501

31

4

2

3

1

Service Modes, Error Codes and Fault Finding GB 23EM3E 5.

5. Service Modes, Error Codes and Fault Finding

Index of this chapter:1. Test points.2. Service Modes.3. Problems and solving tips (related to CSM).4. ComPair.5. Error buffer.6. The blinking LED procedure.7. Protections.8. Repair tips.

5.1 Test Points

The chassis is equipped with test points printed on the circuitboard assemblies. They refer to the diagram letters. Thenumbering is in a logical sequence for diagnostics. Alwaysstart diagnosing (within a functional block), in the sequenceof the relevant test points for that block.

Measurements are performed under the following conditions:• Service Default Mode.• Video: colour bar signal.• Audio: 3 kHz left, 1 kHz right.

5.2 Service Modes

Service Default Mode (SDM) and Service Alignment Mode(SAM) offer several features for the service technician, whilethe Customer Service Menu (CSM) is used forcommunication between dealer and customer.

5.2.1 Service Default Mode (SDM)

Purpose• To create a pre-defined setting, to get the same

measurement results as given in this manual.• To override SW protections.• To start the blinking LED procedure.

Specifications• Tuning frequency: 475.25 MHz for PAL/SECAM.• Colour system: SECAM L for France or PAL B/G for the

rest of Europe.• All picture settings at 50 % (brightness, colour, contrast).• All sound settings at 50 %, except volume at 25 %.• All service-unfriendly modes (if present) are disabled,

like:– (sleep) timer,– child/parental lock,– blue mute,– automatic volume limiter (AVL),– auto switch-off (when no ‘IDENT’ video signal was

received for 10 minutes),– skip/blank of non-favorite pre-sets,– smart modes,– auto store of personal presets,– auto user menu time-out.

How to enter SDMUse one of the following methods:• Via a standard customer RC-transmitter : key in the code

‘062596’ followed by the ‘MENU’ button (it is possiblethat, together with the SDM, the main menu will appear.To switch it off, push the ‘MENU’ button again).

• When you press the ‘DEFAULT’ button on the DealerService Tool (DST or RC7150) while the set is in thenormal operation mode.

• When you shorten for a moment (*) the two solder padson the ‘external part’ of the SSB print (see Figure 7 inChapter 4), with the indication SDM (item 4006).

Activation can be performed in all modes, except whenthe set has a problem with the main-processor.

• Via ComPair.* Caution: If the SDM is entered via the pins, all the software-controlled protections are de-activated.After entering SDM, the following screen will be shown, with‘Service Default’ at the lower right side for recognition.

Figure 5-1

How to navigateWhen you press the ‘MENU’ button on the RC transmitter,the set will toggle between the SDM and the normal usermenu (with the SDM mode still active in the background).

How to exit SDMUse one of the following methods:• Switch the set to STANDBY (�) via the RC-transmitter,

or• Press the ‘EXIT’ button on the DST.

5.2.2 Service Alignment Mode (SAM)

Purpose• To perform alignments.• To change option settings.• To display/clear the error code buffer.

Specifications• Operation hours counter.• Software version.• Option settings.• Error buffer reading and erasing.• Software alignments.

How to enter SAMUse one of the following methods:• Via a standard RC transmitter: key in the code ‘062596’

directly followed by the OSD [i+] button, or• When you press the ALIGN button on the DST while the

set is in the normal operation mode, or• When you shorten for a moment (*) the two solder pads

on the ‘external part’ of the SSB print (see Figure 7 inChapter 4), with the indication SAM (item 4005).Activation can be performed in all modes, except whenthe set has a problem with the main-processor.

• Via ComPair.

* Caution: If the SAM is entered via the pins, all the softwarecontrolled protections are de-activated.The following screen will be shown, with SAM at the upperright side for recognition.

S e r v i c e D e f a u l t

CL 16532044_031.eps140501

Service Modes, Error Codes and Fault FindingGB 24 EM3E5.

Figure 5-2

• Date Displays the software date.• ID Displays the software version of the ROM. Example:

EM3E11.0_01234 (AAABCD.D_XXXXX)– A = the chassis name (EM3).– B = the region: E = Europe, A = Asia Pacific, U =

NAFTA, L = LATAM.– C = the language cluster number.– D = the main software version number.– X = latest 5 digits of 12nc code software.

• SAM Indication of the actual mode.• Operation Hours Displays the accumulated total of

operation hours (not the standby hours).• Errors (followed by maximal 10 errors) The most recent

error is displayed at the upper left (for an errorexplanation see paragraph 5.5.4).

• Defect. Module Here the module that generates theerror is displayed. If there are multiple errors in the bufferthat have not all been generated by a single module,there is probably another defect. It will then display themessage 'Unknown' here.

• Reset Error Buffer When you press the 'OK' button, theerror buffer is reset.

• Functional Test All devices are tested via the 'OK'button. Eventual errors are displayed in the error buffer.The error buffer is not erased, the content returns whenthis test is terminated.

• Alignments This will activate the Alignments sub-menu.• Dealer Options Extra features for the dealers.• Errors (followed by maximal 10 errors) The most recent

error is displayed at the upper left (for an errorexplanation see paragraph 5.5.4).

• Defect. Module Here the module that generates theerror is displayed. If there are multiple errors in the bufferthat have not all been generated by a single module,there is probably another defect. It will then display themessage 'Unknown' here.

• Reset Error Buffer When you press the 'OK' button, theerror buffer is reset.

• Functional Test All devices are tested via the 'OK'button. Eventual errors are displayed in the error buffer.The error buffer is not erased, the content returns whenthis test is terminated.

• Alignments This will activate the Alignments sub-menu.• Dealer Options Extra features for the dealers.

How to navigate• In SAM, you can select the menu items with the

CURSOR UP/DOWN key on the RC-transmitter. Theselected item will be highlighted. When not all menuitems fit on the screen, move the CURSOR UP/DOWNkey to display the next/previous menu items.

• With the CURSOR LEFT/RIGHT keys, it is possible to:– (De)activate the selected menu item.– Change the value of the selected menu item.– Activate the selected submenu.

• When you press the MENU button twice, the set willswitch to the normal user menus (with the SAM mode still

active in the background). To return to the SAM-menupress the ‘OSD [i+]’ button.

• When you press the ‘MENU’ key in a submenu, you willreturn to the previous menu.

How to exit SAMUse one of the following methods:• Press the ‘MENU’ button on the RC-transmitter, or• Switch the set to STANDBY (�) via the RC-transmitter,

or• Press the ‘EXIT’ button on the DST.

5.2.3 Customer Service Mode (CSM)

PurposeWhen a customer is having problems with his TV-set, he cancall his dealer. The service technician can than ask thecustomer to activate the CSM, in order to identify the statusof the set. Now, the service technician can judge theseverness of the complaint. In a lot of cases he can advisethe customer how to solve the problem, or he can decide if itis necessary to visit the customer.The CSM is a read only mode, therefore modifications in thismode are not possible.

How to enter CSMUse one of the following methods:• Press the ‘MUTE’ button on the RC-transmitter

simultaneously with the ‘MENU’ button on the TV (topcontrol) for, at least 4 seconds.

• Key in the code ‘123654’ via the standard RC transmitter.

Note 1: Activation of the CSM is only possible if there is no(user) menu on the screen !Note 2: If you do not point the RC-transmitter correctly to theRC-receiver in the set, and you push the ‘MENU’ button formore than 6 s, the TV starts in ‘demo’ mode. To leave thismode, push ‘MENU’ again for more than 6 s.

After activation of the Customer Service Menu, the followingscreen (Customer Service Menu 0) will appear:

Figure 5-3

• Line 0 - Type number (e.g. 28PW8807/12) Thisinformation is very helpful for a helpdesk/workshop asreference for further diagnosis. In this way, it is notnecessary for the customer to look at the rear of his TV-set.

By means of the 'CURSOR-DOWN' knob on the RC-transmitter the Customer Service Menu 1 will appear. Bymeans of the 'CURSOR-UP' knob on the RC-transmitter theCustomer Service Menu 0 will appear again.

D a t e : M M M D D Y Y Y Y I d : A A A B C D . D _ X X X X X

O p e r a t i o n H o u r s : X X X X X . XE r r o r s : N o E r r o r s

D e f e c t . M o d u l e : U n k n o w n

S e r v i c e

R e s e t E r r o r B u f f e r >F u n c t i o n a l T e s t >A l i g n m e n t s >D e a l e r O p t i o n s >

CL16532044_032.eps140501

C U S T O M E R S E R V I C E M E N U 0

0 T y p e n u m b e r . . . . . . . . . . .

CL16532044_033.eps140501


Customer Service Menu 1 represents following information:

Figure 5-4

• Line 1 - Software version (e.g. EM3E11.0_XXXXX) Thebuild in software version. You will find details of thesoftware versions in the chapter 'Software Survey' of the'Product Survey - Colour Television' publication. Thispublication is generated four times a year.

• Line 2 - Code 1 Gives the last 5 errors of the error buffer.As soon as the built-in diagnose software has detectedan error the buffer is adapted. See paragraph 5.5.4 for adescription.

• Line 3 - Code 2 Gives the first 5 errors of the error buffer.As soon as the built-in diagnose software has detectedan error the buffer is adapted. The last occurred error isdisplayed on the leftmost position of code 2. Each errorcode is displayed as a 3 digit number. When less than 10errors occur, the rest of the line(s) is (are) empty. In caseof no errors the text 'No Errors' is displayed. Seeparagraph 5.5.4 for a description.

• Line 4 - LS Volume Gives the Last Status of the volumeas set by the customer for this selected transmitter. Thevalue can vary from 0 (volume is minimum) to 36 (volumeis maximum). Volume values can be changed via thevolume key on the RC-transmitter.

• Line 5 - LS Brightness Gives the Last Status of thebrightness as set by the customer for this selectedtransmitter. The value can vary from 0 (brightness isminimum) to 63 (brightness is maximum). Brightnessvalues can be changed via the 'CURSOR LEFT' and'CURSOR RIGHT' keys on the RC-transmitter afterpressing the 'MENU' button and selecting 'PICTURE' and'BRIGHTNESS'.

• Line 6 - LS Contrast Gives the Last Status of thecontrast as set by the customer. The value can vary from0 (contrast is minimum) to 63 (contrast is maximum).Contrast values can be changed via 'CURSOR LEFT'and 'CURSOR RIGHT' keys on the RC-transmitter afterpressing the 'MENU' button and selecting 'PICTURE' and'CONTRAST'.

• Line 7 - LS Colour Gives the Last Status of the coloursaturation, as set by the customer. The value can varyfrom 0 (colour is minimum) to 63 (colour is maximum).Colour values can be changed via 'CURSOR LEFT' and'CURSOR RIGHT' keys on the RC-transmitter afterpressing the 'MENU' button and selecting 'PICTURE' and'COLOUR'.

• Line 8 - LS Headphone Gives the Last Status of theheadphone volume, as set by the customer. The valuecan vary from 0 (volume is minimum) to 24 (volume ismaximum). Headphone volume values can be changedvia the 'CURSOR LEFT' and 'CURSOR RIGHT' keys onthe RC-transmitter after pressing the 'MENU' button andselecting 'SOUND' and 'HEADPHONE'.

• Line 9 - Sharpness Gives the sharpness value. Thevalue can vary from 0 (sharpness is minimum) to 7(sharpness is maximum). In case of bad antenna signalsa too high value of the sharpness can result in a noisypicture. Sharpness values can be changed via the'CURSOR LEFT' and 'CURSOR RIGHT' keys on the RC-

transmitter after pressing the 'MENU' button andselecting 'PICTURE' and 'SHARPNESS'.

• Line 10 - Dolby Indicates whether the receivedtransmitter transmits Dolby sound (present) or not (notpresent). Attention: The presence of Dolby can only betested by the software on the Dolby Signalling bit. If aDolby transmission is therefore received without a DolbySignalling bit, then this indicator will show 'not present'even though such a Dolby transmission is received.

• Line 11 - Surround Mode Indicates the by the customerselected surround mode (or automatically chosen mode).In case the set is a Non-Dolby set there will be displayed'0'. If it is a Dolby-set then is displayed: 'Stereo', 3DSurround’, 'Dolby Pro Logic’, ‘Dolby 3 Stereo’ or 'Hall'.These settings can be influenced by toggling thesurround mode button on remote control (white button).It can also have been selected automatically bysignalling bits (internal software

• Line 11a - Tuner Frequency Indicates the frequency theselected transmitter is tuned to. The tuner frequency canbe changed via the ‘CURSOR LEFT’ and ‘CURSORRIGHT’ keys for fine tune or by entering directly with thedigit keys 0 to 9 on the RC-transmitter after opening theinstallation menu and selecting ‘MANUALINSTALLATION’. The installation menu can be openedby pressing ‘TIMER’ and ‘ENLARGE’ at the same time.

By means of the 'CURSOR-DOWN' knob on the RC-transmitter the Customer Service Menu 2 will appear. Bymeans of the 'CURSOR-UP' knob on the RC-transmitter theCustomer Service Menu 1 will appear again.

Customer Service Menu 2 represents following information:

Figure 5-5

• Line 13 - Centre Volume Not valid in this chassis. Mustbe 0.

• Line 14 - DNR Not valid.• Line 15 - Noise Figure Gives the noise ratio for the

selected transmitter. This value can vary from 0 (goodsignal) to 127 (average signal) and to 255 (bad signal).

• Line 16 - Digital Option Gives the selected digital mode,'100 HZ', 'DIGITAL SCAN', ‘NATURAL MOTION’ or‘DOUBLE LINES’. Change via the 'CURSOR LEFT' and'CURSOR RIGHT' keys on the RC-transmitter, afterpressing the ‘MENU' button and selecting 'PICTURE','DIGITAL OPTIONS'.

• Line 17 - Colour System Gives information about thecolour system of the selected transmitter.– Black and white: No colour carrier received– PAL: PAL signal received– SECAM: SECAM signal received– NTSC: NTSC signal received

• Line 18 - TV System Gives information about the videosystem of the selected transmitter.– BG: BG signal received– DK: DK signal received– I: PAL I signal received– L: SECAM L signals received


1 S W V e r s i o n . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C o d e 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 C o d e 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .4 L S V o l u m e . .5 L S B r i g h t n e s s . .6 L S C o n t r a s t . .7 L S C o l o u r . .8 L S H e a d p h o n e . .9 S h a r p n e s s . .

10 D o l b y . . . . .11 S u r r o u n d M o d e . . . . . . . . . . . .11 a T u n e r F r e q u e n c y . . . . . . . . . . . .

CL16532044_034.eps140501


13 C e n t r e V o l u m e . . 14 D N R . . . 15 N o i s e F i g u r e . . 16 D i g i t a l O p t i o n . .17 C o l o u r S y s t e m . . . . .18 T V S y s t e m . . . . .19 A u d i o S y s t e m . . . . .20 T u n e d b i t . . . . .21 S p e a k e r C o n f i g . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 D i g i t a l S o u r c e s . . . . . . . . . . . .

CL16532044_035.eps140501


– M38.9: NTSC M signal received with video carrier on38.9 MHz

• Line 19 - Audio System Gives information about theaudio system of the selected transmitter.– Sound Muted: No sound– Dolby Pro Logic: Dolby Pro Logic sound received– Mono: Mono sound received– Stereo: Stereo sound received– Dual I: Language I received– Dual II: Language II received– Digital Mono: Digital mono sound is received– Digital Stereo: Digital stereo sound is received– Digital Dual I: Digital language I is received– Digital Dual II: Digital language II is received

• Line 20 - Tuned bit Gives information about the tuningmethod of the stored pre-set. If a channel is found via’automatic installation’ you will see the value 'Off'. Whenyou change this (automatically found) frequency via ‘finetune’ adjustment (installation menu - manual installation),the displayed value will change to ‘On’. So when you seethe value ‘On’ in this line, it is an indication that thereceived channel is a non-standard signal (e.g. of aVCR).

• Line 21 - Speaker config. Gives the speakerconfiguration settings. In case the set is a non-Dolby set,it displays '0'. If it is a Dolby-set, it displays: 'FULLINTERNAL', 'L/R EXTERNAL', 'SURROUNDEXTERNAL' or 'FULL EXTERNAL'. Change the speakerconfiguration (for a Dolby-set), via the 'CURSOR LEFT'and 'CURSOR RIGHT' keys on the RC-handset afteropening the ‘INSTALLATION’ menu and selecting'SETUP'. Open the ‘INSTALLATION’ menu by pressingthe 'TIMER' and 'ENLARGE' buttons at the same time.

• Line 22 - Digital Sources Gives the configurationsetting for the digital source. It displays: 'FRONT', 'EXT1','EXT2', ‘EXT3’ or 'NONE'. If one of these is selected, thestarting point is a top quality signal on that input and anumber of settings are therefore changed automatically.Change the digital source via the 'CURSOR LEFT' and'CURSOR RIGHT' keys on the RC-transmitter afteropening the installation menu and selecting 'SETUP'.The installation menu can be opened by pressing'TIMER' and 'ENLARGE' at the same time.

How to exit CSMUse one of the following methods:• After you press a key on the RC-transmitter (with

exception of the ‘CHANNEL’ and ‘VOLUME’ keys), or• After you switch the TV-set ‘OFF’ with the mains switch.

5.3 Problems and Solving Tips (related to CSM)

Note: Below described problems are all related to the TVsettings. The procedures to change the value (or status) ofthe different settings, are described above.The new value(s) are automatically stored.

5.3.1 Picture Problems

Worse picture quality in case of DVD picturesCheck line 22 'Digital sources'. In case line 22 gives theindication 'Not Present', change the setting into 'Present' (viathe ‘installation’ menu).

Snowy/noisy picture1. Check line 15 'Noise Figure'. In case the value is 127 or

higher and the value is also high on other programs,check the aerial cable/aerial system.

2. Check lines 9 'Sharpness' and 15 'Noise Figure'. In casethe value of line 9 is 3 or 4 and the value of line 15 is high(127 or higher), decrease the 'Sharpness' value.

Picture too dark1. Press 'Smart Picture' button on the RC-transmitter. In

case the picture improves, increase the ‘Brightness’ orthe ‘Contrast’ value. The new value(s) are automaticallystored (in ‘personal’ pre-set) for all TV channels.

2. Check lines 5 'LS Brightness' and 6 'LS Contrast'. If thevalue of line 5 is low (< 10) or the value of line 6 is low(< 10), increase the ‘Brightness’ or the ‘Contrast’ value.

Picture too bright1. Press 'Smart Picture' button on the RC-transmitter. In

case the picture improves, decrease the ‘Brightness’ orthe ‘Contrast’ value. The new value(s) are automaticallystored (in ‘personal’ pre-set) for all TV channels.

2. Check lines 5 'LS Brightness' and 6 'LS Contrast'. If thevalue of line 5 is high (> 40) or the value of line 6 is high(< 50). Decrease the ‘Brightness’ value or increase the‘Contrast’ value.

White line around picture elements and text1. Press 'Smart Picture' button on the Remote Control. In

case the picture improves, decrease the ‘Sharpness’value. The new value is automatically stored (in‘personal’ pre-set) for all TV channels.

2. Check line 9 'Sharpness'. Decrease the ‘Sharpness’value. The new value is automatically stored for all TVchannels.

No pictureCheck line 20 'Tuned bit'. In case the value is ‘On’, install therequired program again. Open the installation menu bypressing 'timer' and 'enlarge' at the same time and performmanual installation.

Blue pictureNo proper signal is received. Check the aerial cable/aerialsystem.

Blue picture and/or unstable pictureA scrambled or decoded signal is received.

Black and white pictureCheck line 7 'LS Colour'. In case the value is low (< 10)increase the ‘Colour’ value. The new value is automaticallystored for all TV channels.

No colours/colour lines around picture elements1. Check lines 17 'Colour System' and 18 'TV System'. If a

‘strange’ system pop’s up, something has gone wrongduring installation. Re-install the channel.

2. In case line 17 is ‘PAL’ and line 18 is ‘L’, the installedsystem for this pre-set is ‘France’, while ‘West Europe’ isrequired. Install the required program again: open theinstallation menu by pressing 'timer' and 'enlarge' at thesame time and perform manual installation. Selectsystem ‘West Europe’.

Colours not correctCheck lines 17 'Colour System' and 18 'TV System'. In caseline 17 is ‘PAL’ and line 18 is ‘L’, the installed system for thispre-set is ‘France’, while ‘West Europe’ is required. Install therequired program again: open the installation menu bypressing 'timer' and 'enlarge' at the same time and performmanual installation. Select ‘System; West Europe’.

Colours not correct/unstable pictureCheck lines 17 'Colour System' and 18 'TV System'. In caseline 17 is ‘SECAM’ and line 18 is ‘BG’, the installed systemfor this pre-set is ‘West Europe’, while ‘France’ is required.Install the required program again: open the installationmenu by pressing 'timer' and 'enlarge' at the same time andperform manual installation. Select ‘System; France’.


Unstable pictureCheck lines 17 'Colour System' and 18 'TV System'. In caseline 17 is ‘SECAM’ and line 18 is ‘M 38,9’, the installedsystem for this pre-set is ‘West Europe’, while ‘France’ isrequired. Install the required program again: open theinstallation menu by pressing 'timer' and 'enlarge' at thesame time and perform manual installation. Select ‘System;France’.

Menu text not sharp enough1. Press 'Smart Picture' button on the RC-transmitter. In

case picture improves, Decrease the contrast value. Thenew value(s) are automatically stored for all TVchannels.

2. Check line 7 'LS Contrast'. The value of line 7 is high (>50). Decrease the contrast value.

5.3.2 Sound Problems

No sound from left and right speaker1. Check line 4 'LS Volume'. The value is low. Increase the

value of 'Volume'. The new value(s) are automaticallystored (in ‘personal’ pre-set) for all TV channels.

Sound too loud for left and right speaker1. Check line 4 'LS Volume'. The value is high. Decrease

the value of 'LS Volume'. The new value(s) areautomatically stored (in ‘personal’ pre-set) for all TVchannels.

5.4 ComPair

5.4.1 Introduction

ComPair (Computer Aided Repair) is a service tool for PhilipsConsumer Electronics products. ComPair is a furtherdevelopment on the European DST (service remote control),which allows faster and more accurate diagnostics. ComPairhas three big advantages:• ComPair helps you to quickly get an understanding on

how to repair the chassis in a short time by guiding yousystematically through the repair procedures.

• ComPair allows very detailed diagnostics (on I2C level)and is therefore capable of accurately indicating problemareas. You do not have to know anything about I2Ccommands yourself because ComPair takes care of this.

• ComPair speeds up the repair time since it canautomatically communicate with the chassis (when themicroprocessor is working) and all repair information isdirectly available. When ComPair is installed togetherwith the SearchMan electronic manual of the defectivechassis, schematics and PWBs are only a mouse clickaway.

5.4.2 Specifications

ComPair consists of a Windows based faultfinding programand an interface box between PC and the (defective)product. The ComPair interface box is connected to the PCvia a serial or RS232 cable.In case of the EM3E chassis, the ComPair interface box andthe TV communicate via a bi-directional service cable via theservice connector.

The ComPair faultfinding program is able to determine theproblem of the defective television. ComPair can gatherdiagnostic information in two ways:• Automatic (by communication with the television):

ComPair can automatically read out the contents of theentire error buffer. Diagnosis is done on I2C level.ComPair can access the I2C bus of the television.ComPair can send and receive I2C commands to themicro controller of the television. In this way, it is possible

for ComPair to communicate (read and write) to deviceson the I2C busses of the TV-set.

• Manually (by asking questions to you): Automaticdiagnosis is only possible if the micro controller of thetelevision is working correctly and only to a certainextends. When this is not the case, ComPair will guideyou through the faultfinding tree by asking you questions(e.g. Does the screen give a picture? Click on the correctanswer: YES / NO) and showing you examples (e.g.Measure test-point I7 and click on the correct oscillogramyou see on the oscilloscope). You can answer by clickingon a link (e.g. text or a waveform picture) that will bringyou to the next step in the faultfinding process.

By a combination of automatic diagnostics and an interactivequestion / answer procedure, ComPair will enable you to findmost problems in a fast and effective way.

Beside fault finding, ComPair provides some additionalfeatures like:• Up- or downloading of pre-sets.• Managing of pre-set lists.• Emulation of the Dealer Service Tool (DST).• If both ComPair and SearchMan (Electronic Service

Manual) are installed, all the schematics and the PWBsof the set are available by clicking on the appropriatehyperlink.Example: Measure the DC-voltage on capacitor C2568(Schematic/Panel) at the Monocarrier. Click on the‘Panel’ hyperlink to automatically show the PWB with ahighlighted capacitor C2568. Click on the ‘Schematic’hyperlink to automatically show the position of thehighlighted capacitor.

5.4.3 Stepwise Start Up / Shut Down

Under normal circumstances, a fault in the power supply, oran error during start-up, will switch the television to protectionmode. ComPair can take over the initialisation of thetelevision. In this way it is possible to distinguish which partof the start-up routine (hence which circuitry) is causing theproblem.

Stepwise start up explanationThis is realised via ComPair and is very helpful when aprotection is activated (see also chapter 5.7).

Figure 5-6

State Description mode DisplayLED (Red)

Enabledprotection

0 Low power stdby:5V2/3V3 present, uPin stdby-mode

On None

1 High power Stdby:TV-set in stdby-mode

Wait 1s,flash 1 x

None

2 SSB is powered bystdby-supply(5V/8V). Degaussing(12 s) has beenactivated.

Wait 1s,flash 2 x

4 & 5

3 Semi stdby-mode:HIP, HOP, MSP andTuner initializedleading to semistdby-mode.

Wait 1s,flash 3 x

Plus 1, 6 & 18

4 All ICs areinitialized, HOPactivates the mainsupply, EHT-generation starts,black currentstabilization is on

Wait 1s,flash 4 x

Plus 2 & 16

5 TV On: TV-setoperates, un-blanked picture.

Wait 1s,flash 5 x

CL 16432044_036.eps140501


Stepwise shut down explanationIn the stepwise shutdown mode, state 2 is skipped (it is notpossible to de-initialise ICs).

Figure 5-7

Note: When the set is in stepwise mode and, due tostepping-up, a protection is activated, the set will really gointo protection (blinking red LED). The set will not leave thestepwise-mode however. By stepping up, the set can beactivated again, until state X where the protection wasactivated. At state (X-1) diagnostic measurements can beperformed.

5.4.4 How To Connect

1. First install the ComPair Browser software (see the QuickReference Card for installation instructions).

2. Connect the RS232 interface cable between a free serial(COM) port of your PC and the PC connector (markedwith ‘PC’) of the ComPair interface.

3. Connect the mains adapter to the supply connector(marked with ‘POWER 9V DC’) of the ComPair interface.

4. Switch the ComPair interface ’OFF’.5. Switch the television set ‘OFF’ with the mains switch.6. Connect the ComPair interface cable between the

connector on the rear side of the ComPair interface(marked with ‘I2C’) and the ComPair connector at therear side of the TV (situated just below the tuner input,see also chapter 4).

7. Plug the mains adapter in a mains outlet, and switch theinterface ‘ON’. The green and red LEDs light up together.The red LED extinguishes after approx. 1 second whilethe green LED remains lit.

8. Start the ComPair program and read the ‘Introduction’chapter.

Figure 5-8

5.4.5 How To Order

ComPair order codes:• Starter kit ComPair + SearchMan software + ComPair

interface (excluding transformer): 4822 727 21629• ComPair interface (excluding transformer): 4822 727

21631• Starter kit ComPair software (registration version): 4822

727 21634• Starter kit SearchMan software: 4822 727 21635• ComPair CD (update): 4822 727 21637• SearchMan CD (update): 4822 727 21638• ComPair interface cable: 3122 785 90004

5.5 Error Buffer

5.5.1 Introduction

The error code buffer contains all detected errors since thelast time the buffer was erased. The buffer is written from leftto right. When an error occurs that is not yet in the error codebuffer, it is written at the left side and all other errors shift oneposition to the right.

5.5.2 How to Read the Error Buffer

Use one of the following methods:• On screen via the SAM (only if you have a picture).

Examples:– ERROR: 0 0 0 0 0 : No errors detected– ERROR: 6 0 0 0 0 : Error code 6 is the last and only

detected error– ERROR: 9 6 0 0 0 : Error code 6 was first detected

and error code 9 is the last detected (newest) error• Via the blinking LED procedure (when you have no

picture). See next paragraph.• Via ComPair.

5.5.3 How to Clear the Error Buffer

Use one of the following methods:• By activation of the ‘RESET ERROR BUFFER’

command in the SAM menu:• When you transmit the commands ‘DIAGNOSE’ - ‘99’ -

‘OK’ with ComPair (or with a DST).• If the content of the error buffer has not changed for 50

hours, it resets automatically.

5.5.4 Error Codes

In case of non-intermittent faults, clear the error buffer beforeyou begin the repair. These to ensure that old error codes areno longer present.

If possible, check the entire contents of the error buffer. Insome situations an error code is only the result of anothererror code and not the actual cause (e.g., a fault in theprotection detection circuitry can also lead to a protection).

State Description mode DisplayLED (Red)

Disabledprotections

5 TV On: TV-setoperates, un-blanked picture

Wait 1s,flash 5 x

-

3 Semi stdby-mode:SSB is powered bythe stdby-supply

Wait 1s,flash 3 x

18, 16, 6, 2 &1

1 High power stdby:TV-set in stdby-mode

Wait 1s,flash 1 x

4 & 5

0 Low power stdby:5V2/3V3 present, uPin stdbymode

On

CL 16432044_037.eps140501

CL96532160_029.eps110100

PC VCR I2CPower9V DC

R

L

AUDIO EXTERNAL 1

EXTERNAL 2

SERVICECONNECTOR


Figure 5-9

Note: Error codes 1, 6 or 18 are protection codes and in thiscase, supplies of some circuits will be switched off. Also inprotection, the LED will blink the number of times equivalentto the most recent error code.

5.6 The Blinking LED Procedure

5.6.1 Introduction

Via this procedure, you can make the contents of the errorbuffer visible via the front LED. This is especially useful forfault finding, when there is no picture.

When the SDM is entered, the front LED will show (blink) thecontents of the error-buffer. Error-codes � 10 are shown asfollows:– a long blink of 750 ms (which is an indication of the

decimal digit),– a pause of 1.5 s,– n short blinks (where n = 1 - 9),– when all the error-codes are displayed, the sequence

finishes with a LED blink of 3 s,– the sequence starts again.

Example: Error 12 9 6 0 0.After activation of the SDM, the red front LED will show:– 1 long blink of 750 ms (which is an indication of the

decimal digit) followed by a pause of 1.5 s,– 2 short blinks followed by a pause of 3 s,– 9 short blinks followed by a pause of 3 s,– 6 short blinks followed by a pause of 3 s,– 1 long blink of 3 s to finish the sequence,– the sequence starts again.

Note 1: If errors 1, 6 or 18 occur, the LED always gives thelast occurred error even if the set is NOT in service mode.Note 2: If on the DST the text 'ERROR 2' is displayed, thecommunication from the TV to the DST has failed.

5.6.2 How to Enter

Use one of the following methods:• Enter the SDM. The blinking red front LED will show the

contents of the error buffer (this works only in ‘normaloperation’ mode).

• Transmit the commands ‘DIAGNOSE’ - ‘0’ - ‘OK’ with aDST/ComPair (this works both in ‘Standby mode’ and‘protection’ mode). The complete error buffer is shown.

• Via the ‘DIAGNOSE’ - ‘X’ - ‘OK’ function on the DST/ComPair (where X is a number between 1 and 5):1. Press the ‘DIAGNOSE’ button on the DST (possible

in all modes except SAM).2. Press ‘1’ to view the last detected error (or ‘2’, etc. to

show the errors before).3. Press the ‘OK’ button. The red front LED will now

give the requested error.

5.7 Protections

5.7.1 Introduction

The EM3E has only one micro-processor (OTC), whichremains active during Standby. This because power of themicroprocessor and the attached memory chip set is comingfrom the 3V3 supply, which is derived from the 5V Standby-circuitry (via stabiliser 7005). So in both Power-on as inStandby mode the microprocessor is connected to this powersupply.

If a fault situation is detected, an error code will be generatedand if necessary, the set is put in protection mode. Theprotection mode is indicated by the blinking of the red frontLED at a frequency of 3 Hz (or by a coded blinking in specialcases). In some error cases however, the micro processordoes not put the set in the protection mode (this is the casewith the - hardware - loudspeaker protection of the audioamplifier).

Error Device Description Defective item Diagram Defect. module indication1 ST24E32 NVM, spontaneous blinking

1-1-1..7011 B5 Control

2 H fail protection HFB Horizontal FlybackOr HW-protection due to:- ARC_PROT- BRIDGE_PROT- NON_VFB PROT

3 SAA4978 PICNIC 7709 B3 Feature Box4 Supply 5 V 5V2 protection B5 +5 V Supply5 Supply 8 V 8V6 protection B5 +8 V Supply6 Slow I2C-bus blocked Slow I2C-bus blocked,

spontaneous blinking 6-6-6..Slow I2C blocked

7 TDA9330 HOP video control/geometry 7301 B4 Video Controller8 TDA9320 HIP I/O video processing 7323 B2 Chroma IF IO9 PCF8574 Wireless expander10 Reserved11 Reserved12 TDA9178 LTP Peaking Video Controller13 UV1316/TEDE9 Tuner U1200 A8 Tuner14 MSP34xx Sound processor + Dolby 7651 B6 Audio Module15 Reserved16 Featurebox protection Featurebox protection B3 +3 V (FBX) supply17 Reserved18 Fast I2C-bus blocked Fast I2C-bus blocked,

spontaneous blinking 18-18-18..

Fast I2C blocked

CL 16432044_038.eps280501


The content of the error buffer can be read via the servicemenu (SAM), the blinking LED procedure or via DST/ComPair.The DST/ComPair ‘diagnose’ functionality will force the setinto the ‘Service Standby’, which is alike the usual Standby,however the microprocessor remains completely in normaloperation.

To get a quick diagnosis the EM3E has 3 service-modesimplemented:• The Customer Service Mode (CSM).• The Service Default Mode (SDM). Start-up of the set in a

predefined way.• The Service Alignment Mode (SAM). In this mode items

of the set can be adjusted via a menu and with the helpof test patterns.

Both SDM & SAM modes can be entered via the 'servicepads' on the SSB (see Figure 4-7), via an RC-transmitter(DST or standard RC) or via ComPair. It is not possible toenter the SAM in Standby, the set has to be in ‘normaloperation’ mode.

The EM3E 'Protection Diagram' shows the structure of theprotection system. See diagram below.

Figure 5-10

There are several types of protections:• I2C related protections.• OTC related protections (via polling on I/O pins or via

algorithms).• HOP related protections (mainly for deflection items).• Hardware errors that are not sensed by the OTC (e.g.

BRIDGECOIL_PROT, NON_VFB, ARC_PROT).All protections are explained below.

5.7.2 I2C Related Protections

In normal operation, some registers of the I2C controlled ICsare refreshed every 200 ms. During this sequence, the I2Cbusses and the I2C ICs are checked.An I2C protection will take place if the SDA and SCL lines areshort-circuited to ground, or to each other. An I2C error willalso occur, if the power supply of the IC is missing (e.g.FBX_PROT (error 16)).

5.7.3 OTC Related Protections

If a protection is detected at an OTC input, the OTC will startto scan all protection inputs every 200 ms for 5 times. If theprotection on one of the inputs is still active after 1 s, the �Pwill put the set in the protection mode. Before the scanningis started, a so called ‘ESD refresh’ is carried out. This isdone, because the interrupt on one of the inputs is possiblycaused either by a flash or by ESD. As a flash or ESD caninfluence IC settings, the HOP, HIP, MSP, PICNIC, NVM andTuner are initialised again, to ensure the normal picture andsound conditions of the set.

8 V and 5 V protection: The �P senses the presence of the8 V and 5 V (via the ‘+5V_CON’ and ‘+8V_CON’ lines). If one(or both) of these voltages is (are) not present, an error codeis stored in the error buffer of the NVM, and the set is put inthe protection mode.

5.7.4 HOP Related Protections

Every 200 ms, the status register of the HOP is read by theOTC (via the I2C bus). If a protection signal is detected onone of the inputs of the HOP, the relevant error bit in the HOPregister is set to ‘high’. If this error bit is still ‘high’ after 1 s,the OTC will store the error code in the error buffer of theNVM and, depending on the relevancy of the error bit, the setwill either go into the protection mode or not.

The following protections are implemented:• HFB (Horizontal Flyback): If the horizontal flyback is

not present, this is detected via the HOP (HFB_X-RAY_PROT). One status bit is set to ‘high’. The errorcode is stored in the error buffer and the set will go intothe protection mode.

• Flash detection: When a flash is detected via the EHT-info line (via D6303 and T7303), the H-drive (and so theLine output stage) is stopped immediately. The FLS-bit inthe HOP status register is set to ‘high’. As the duration ofa flash is very short, the FLS-bit is re-set to ‘low’ againafter the flash refresh, and via a ‘slow start’ the set willstart again.

5.7.5 Hardware Related Protections

Due to the architecture (with 'hot' deflection) there are someprotections that can not be sensed by the microprocessor.Three of these protections will lead to a protection on setlevel (Standby mode and blinking LED), while another willonly lead to a circuit protection.

TV-set ProtectionThe following fault conditions will lead to a ‘complete’ setprotection:• BRIDGECOIL protection: This is sensed via the ‘EW’

signal going to the base of TS7652 (via R3495 andD6499). In a normal situation, the voltage on C2498(diagram A4) is high, TS7652 is conducting. When bridgecoil 5422 (diagram A3) is short circuited, the voltage onC2498 changes to low, which will block TS7652. In thiscase, also TS7641 will block and the voltage on 2642 willrise until TS7443 is forced in conduction. The ‘SUP-ENABLE’ signal (in normal operating condition -20 V) isshorted now to ground level, which will force the MainPower Supply to Standby mode.

• ARC protection: If there are ‘open’ connections (e.g.bad solder joints) in the high energy deflection circuitry,this can lead to damaging effects (read: fire). For thatreason, the E/W current is sensed (via 3479//3480). Ifthis current becomes too high, the ‘thyristor’ circuit(TS7653 and TS7654) is triggered. TS7442 is switched‘on’ and TS7443 is forced into conduction. . The ‘SUP-ENABLE’ signal is shorted now to ground level, which willforce the Main Power Supply to Standby mode.

XPR (43)

7301

7001

FLS (5)

HFB-XRAY-PROT

HOP

+8V SENSE (105)

+5V SENSE (106)

OTC

EHT-info

HFB

+5V_CON

+8V_CON

Flash detect

I2C

I2C PROTECTIONS

HIP

HOP

PICNIC

TUNER

NVM

DNR

MSP

TOPIC

I2CI2C

PICNIC 3V3FBXPROTECTION

CL 16532044_024.eps090501


• NON_VFB (No vertical Flyback) protection. If theframe stage generates no pulses, TS7641 will block.TS7443 is now switched ‘on’, which will lead to Standbymode. So in normal operation condition, TS7641 andTS7652 are conducting, while TS7443 is blocked.

Circuit ProtectionThe following fault condition will lead to a ‘partly’ setprotection:• PROT1 protection: When a DC-voltage (positive or

negative) is sensed on one of the loudspeaker outputs,the protection circuit (TS7704, 7705, 7706 and 7707),will put the IC7700 in Standby mode (via tri-state inputpin 6). For more details see chapter 9.

5.8 Repair Tips

5.8.1 Miscellaneous

The relay you hear when you switch the set 'on' (fromStandby or via the mains switch), is from the degaussingcircuitry. It is not used for switching the Power Supply (asdone in the MG-chassis).

Take care not to touch the ‘hot’ heatsink while disconnectingthe SSB, despite the fact that the mains cord is out of themains socket. There can still be an annoying rest-voltage onthe heatsink for a short while. This, because the dischargeresistors 3502 and 3503 (on the LSP between hot and coldpart) are not stuffed for Europe.Instead, discharge resistors 3066 and 3057 on the MainsSwitch panel are used, but because they are located beforethe Mains switch, they only discharge when this switch is‘on’.Advice: when you remove the SSB, disconnect the Mainscord, but keep the Mains switch ‘on’.

Do not try to measure on the SSB side, which is facing the‘hot’ heatsink. This is dangerous. Most service test points areguided to the ‘tuner’ side and are indicated by the ‘service’printing. Where the circuitry was too ‘crowded’ for thisprinting, you can find the correct location on the ‘test pointoverviews’ in this manual (chapter 6).

A very large part of the LSP is 'hot', such as:– the primary part of the Standby Supply,– the whole Main supply (except for the secondary Audio

supply),– and the complete deflection circuitry (so notice that the

deflection coil is hot !!).

5.8.2 Start-up Sequence

The start up sequence differs from other sets (e.g. MG-setsor EM2E-sets):1. When the set is switched ‘on’, the 5 and 8 V lines

(‘+5V_CON’ and ‘+8V_CON’) of the standby powersupply are activated.

2. After they are sensed by the OTC, the �P will address theHOP via the I2C-bus, to start the drive [1].

3. Via the ‘SUP-ENABLE’ signal, the Main Supply isswitched ‘on’ and will deliver the VBAT to the Linedeflection stage [2].

4. EHT generation is now started.5. The OTC will un-blank the picture.6. When you switch ‘off’ the set, this is done in a controlled

way via the POR signal [3].

Note: Standby is not directly achieved via the Standby line ofthe microprocessor, but indirectly via the HOP circuitry.

Figure 5-11

5.8.3 ComPair

This chassis does not have an IR transmitting LED (as in MG-sets). Therefore a ‘Service’ (ComPair) connector isimplemented at the rear side of the set, which is directlyaccessible (as in EM2E-sets). In addition to this, there is alsoa blinking LED procedure to show the contents of the errorbuffer.

When you use ComPair, you have the possibility to activatea ‘stepwise start-up’ mode. With this mode, you can initiatethe start-up sequence step by step. This also means that incertain steps, some protections are not activated. This issometimes very convenient during repair (see alsoparagraph 5.4.3).

5.8.4 Protections

There are ‘service pads’ implemented on the SSB (items4005 and 4006, outside the shielding), to force the set inSDM or SAM (see also Fig. 7 in Chapter 4). This will overrulethe processor-controlled protections, but not the hardwareprotections. This means, that the A/D-input protections (5and 8 V) and the I2C ‘not-acknowledging’ info from thefeature box (FBX) are overruled. Caution: When doing this,the service technician must know what he is doing, as it couldlead to damaging the set.

The ‘ARC’- and/or ‘BRIDGECOIL’ protection are hardly evertriggered, however:– When you suspect the ‘ARC’ protection, look for bad

solderjoints and smell. By interrupting resistor 3497, thisprotection is disabled (special attention needed !).

– When you suspect the ‘BRIDGECOIL’ protection, whichcan also be due to a too wide picture amplitude, shortenG and S of of the E/W MOSFET 7480. This will disablethe protection. You will now have a minimal horizontalamplitude. Re-align the horizontal amplitude in the SAMmenu and remove the G/S short of TS7480.

5.8.5 Main Supply

• The simplest way is, to replace the components of theMain Supply with repair kit (3122 785 90310)

• More detailed way:

RESET

5VCON

8VCON

8V

29

I2C BUS

5

17/39 OUT

HOP

CUTOFF(from CRT panel)

START/STOP

START/STOP

COLD

EHT-INFO

HOT

7131

71415V

8V

+11D

OTC

POR

POR7445

106 105

99 104

STANDBYlow 7131/41 closedhigh 7131/41 open

220 VAC

STBYSUPPLY

Vbat

SUP-ENABLE

MAINSUPPLY

PROT-SENSING

LINE DEFL.(BRIDGECOIL-PROT)(ARC-PROT)

FRAMEDEFL

(NON-VFB)

CL16532044_023.eps140501

1

3

2


– Replace FET 7504 and zener 6505.– Remove the SSB panel.– Short B and E of TS7529, in order to put the Main

Supply in ‘on’-mode (TS7529 is blocking then).Caution: To prevent that this will damage R3403and TS7443, first disable the HW-protection ofthe deflection circuit. Therefor short circuit C2642on the LSP (diagram A4)

– Attach a load of 500 � to VBAT capacitor C2515 (thesupply can not work without a minimum load).

– Use a variac, and slowly increase the VMAINS.Measure over sensing resistors R3514//15 if a nicesawtooth voltage becomes available.

– Also measure the VBAT . This may never exceed+141 V. If it does, there is something wrong in thefeedback circuitry (e.g. regulator 7506).

• Note: Be careful when measuring on the gate of FETTS7504. This circuitry is very high-ohmic and can easilybe damaged (first connect ground to measuringequipment, than measure the gate).

5.8.6 Standby Supply

The simplest way is to replace the components of theStandby Supply with repair kit 3122 785 90320.

5.8.7 Line Deflection

The simplest way is to replace the components of the LineDeflection circuitry with repair kit 3122 785 90330.

5.8.8 Frame Deflection

Caution: When the Frame Deflection circuitry is suspected,one must be careful. Because there is a DC-voltage on theframe deflection, the beam current could damage the CRTneck, leading to a defective CRT.

Best thing to do is:1. Interrupt the resistors 3403 and 3404 on the CRT panel

(diagram F), in order to remove the ‘filament’ voltagefrom the tube (no beam current, so no chance ofdestroying the CRT).

2. Interrupt resistor 3403 on the LSP (diagram A4) todisable the ‘SUP-ENABLE’ line.

3. Measure with a multimeter, or better with a oscilloscope,the functionality of the Frame stage.

4. After you’ve found the cause, exchange the defectivecomponent (e.g. TDA8177), and re-solder theinterrupted resistors.


Phenomenon Possible Cause Repair tipNo picture, no LED. Standby Supply defective. Measure circuitry (see diagram A2). Start at test-point A19.

When the Mains switch is ‘on’, this voltage must always be availableNo picture, no LED. Bad connection of SSB in

SIMM-connector.In case of a bad connection, it can happen that there is no picture, and that theStandby LED is not controllable. Re-place the SSB.

No picture, red LEDblinking at 3 Hz.

Set is in protection due tovarious causes. For errorcodes see error-code list.

You have no picture, so:- or you read the error buffer via ComPair- or you read the blinking LED information via ‘diagnose’-‘x’-‘ok’ on DST- or you read the error code sequence via ‘diagnose’-‘0’-‘ok’ with the DST.When you have found the error, check the circuitry related to the supply voltageand I2C-communication or the circuitry that triggers the protection.

No picture, red LEDblinking with code 6-6-6or 18-18-18.

No communication on slowI2C- or fast I2C-bus.

As processor cannot communicate with one of the 2 busses it the standby-ledspontaneously starts blinking 6-6-6… or 18-18-18….If in the error buffer somewhere is an error 6 or 18, these will have the highestpriority starting the mentioned blinking.Measure dependent of the error on the I2C-bus which device is loading the bus.(use I2C -overview)

No picture, red LEDblinking with code 1-1-1.

No communication on NVM-I2C bus to the µP.

As the µP cannot communicate with the NVM I2C bus, it spontaneously startsblinking 1-1-1. Note: when there is no access to the NVM, a lot of picturesetting can go wrong.

No picture, no sound.Set is making audiblesqueaking sound

Supply is possibly in hiccup-mode, which is audible via asqueaking supply transformer.

Possible causes:- VBAT is shorted (caused by short circuited line transistor 7421), or- Sound winding is shorted (amplifier is shortening the power supply lines),

or- D6514 is shorted (due to a too high VBAT).Remove excessive load, to see what causes the failure, or check feedbackcircuit. See repair tip ‘Main Power Supply’ (supply needs a minimal load).

No picture, no sound.Green LED works fine

Supply does not workcorrectly.

If e.g. VBAT is only about 90 V, it is possible that the regulator IC (7506) isdefective.

No RC-reception. RedLED does not echo RC-commands.

µP circuitry or RC-receiver isdefective.

In case the set does react on a local keyboard operation, you must check theRC-receiver circuitry (diagram E).

Relay (degaussing) isnot audible, when set isswitched from ‘off‘ or‘standby’ to ‘on’.

µP is not working correctly.When pin 115 is low, thedegaussing must beactivated.

Check RESET-circuitry on diagram B5. Check the level on pin 115 when youswitch the set ‘on’. Signal must be low initially and go to high after approx. 12 s.

No sound, only picture. Measure A7/A8 on diagramA1. Possibly the audioamplifier is defect (but notshorted), or the ‘soundenable’ line is high (diagramA5). Further, measure theaudio signal path (HIP-MSP-Switch ICs-Amplifier).

In ComPair, a beep test can determine where the signal stops (useloudspeakers or headphone).Possible cause is also the ‘PROT1’ protection (see diagram. A6). This is aloudspeaker DC protection, which the µP can not sense. Via circuitry7701/7707, this signal can put audio amplifiers 7700 and 7702 in standby mode(tri-state input). Warning: Find out, which amplifier is causing the problem,because it is possible, that the other one is OK.

No sound at headphoneoutput.

HP amplifier (7770), or thesupply to it, malfunctions.

Measure test points A64 to A67, and the supply line (+/- 16/19V) on diagramA7.

Picture is rotated. Rotation circuitry, or relatedsupply to it, malfunctions.

Measure test points A52 and A53 on diagram A5.

Picture is continuouslyswitching ‘off’ and ‘on’,showing heavy ‘switch’spots (set does not gointo protection).

200 V is missing on CRTpanel.

Probably a bad connection from LSP connector 1424 to CRT connector 1224(diagram F), or an interruption of the 200 V supply line (e.g. R3341 isinterrupted).

Picture is not sharp. Focus is possibly mis-alignedor SCAVEM-circuitry does notwork correctly.

Re-align the ‘focus’ potmeter on the Line Output Transformer, or check theSCAVEM circuitry on the CRT-panel (diagram F). It is also possible that theDAF circuitry is defective (see diagram I). Check the Vdc values.

Picture is notsynchronised.

The sync is derived in the HIPfrom xtal 1305 and/or 1308.

Maybe the crystals 1305 and/or 1308 are making a bad contact.

Picture is distorted. Check video-path in ServiceDefault Mode.

Investigate whether there is an error code present in the error buffer. In casethere is one, check the I2C-bus and/or supply lines (see overview supply lines).Measure and check signal path Tuner-HIP-PICNIC-HOP-RGB amplifier.In case it is a geometry issue, check opto-coupler 7482, OpAmps 7440/7450and the Frame circuitry alignments or a possible corrupted NVM (7011).

Picture with horizontalstripes.

Feature box processing ismalfunctioning

Check functionality of PICNIC (7709), FALCONIC (7726) and/or field memories(7714 and 7740). TS7726 and 7740 are suspected.

No menu, no OSD. Probably a defective µP. Measure test points B61to B64 on diagram B5.

No NextView (EPG). IC7012 defective or notpowered.

Check circuitry around IC7012.

No Teletext. IC7007 defective or notpowered.

Check circuitry around IC7007. Check also B61to B64 around µP on diagramB5.

Strange switch ‘off’behaviour

TS7445 possibly defective. Check, with a multimeter, whether transistor TS7445 is well functioning.

Various symptoms, dueto missing local supplyvoltage.

An interrupted fuse, NFR-resistor or connection.

When no symptom or error code leads you to a specific circuitry, use the supplylines overview (see chapter 6), for a quick scan of all supply lines.

CL 16532044_039.eps140501


Personal Notes:

Electrical Alignments GB 87EM3E 8.

8. Electrical Alignments

Index of this chapter:1. General alignment conditions.2. Hardware alignments.3. Software alingnments.4. Option settings.

Note: The Service Default Mode (SDM) and ServiceAlignment Mode (SAM) are described in chapter 5. Menunavigation is done with the 'CURSOR UP, DOWN, LEFT orRIGHT' keys of the remote control transmitter.

8.1 General Alignment Conditions

Perform all electrical adjustments under the followingconditions:• Power supply voltage: 230 VAC / 50 Hz (� 10 %).• Connect the set to the mains via an isolation transformer

with low internal resistance.• Allow the set to warm up for approximately 20 minutes.• Measure the voltages and waveforms in relation to

chassis ground (with the exception of the voltages on theprimary side of the power supply).Caution: never use the cooling fins / plates as ground.

• Test probe: Ri > 10 M�, Ci < 20 pF.• Use an isolated trimmer/screwdriver to perform the

alignments.

8.2 Hardware Alignments

Figure 8-1

8.2.1 Vg2 Adjustment

Method 1 (without oscilloscope)1. Activate the SAM.2. Select ‘Alignments’.3. Select the ‘General’ sub-menu.4. Set ‘Vg2 Test Pattern’ to ‘On’5. First turn the Vg2 potmeter on the LOT (see Fig. 8-1) to

the left (OSD feedback will show ‘Out high’).6. Turn the Vg2 potmeter slowly clockwise until you read ‘In

low’. This is the correct value.

Method 2 (with oscilloscope)In the frame-blanking period of the R, G and B signals appliedto the CRT, the ‘HOP’ video processor inserts a measuringpulse with different DC levels. Measure the black level pulseduring the vertical flyback at the RGB cathodes of the CRT.1. Go, via the MENU key, to the normal user menu, select

PICTURE, and set CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS to 0.2. Activate the SAM.3. Connect the RF output of a pattern generator to the

antenna input. Test pattern is a 'black' picture (blankscreen on CRT without any OSD info).

4. Set the channel of the oscilloscope to 50 V/div and thetime base to 0.2 ms. Use external triggering on thevertical pulse (caution: use e.g. R3641 ,which is at the‘cold’ side!).

5. Ground the scope at the CRT panel (‘cold’ side) andconnect a 10:1 probe to one of the cathodes of thepicture tube socket (see diagram F).

6. Measure the cut off pulse during first full line after theframe blanking (see Fig. 8-2). You will see two pulses,one being the cut-off pulse and the other being the whitedrive pulse. Choose the one with the lowest value, this isthe cut-off pulse.

7. Select the cathode with the highest VDC value for thealignment. Adjust the Vcutoff of this gun with the SCREENpotentiometer on the LOT (see Fig. 8-1) to the correctvalue (160 � 3 VDC).

8. Restore CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS to normal(CONTRAST= 63 and BRIGHTNESS= 34).

Figure 8-2

8.2.2 Focusing

1. Tune the set to a circle & crosshatch test pattern (use anexternal video pattern generator).

2. Choose picture mode ‘NATURAL’ with the ‘SMARTPICTURE’ button on the remote control transmitter.

3. Adjust the FOCUS 1 potentiometer (upper potmeter, seeFig. 8-1) until the horizontal and vertical lines at 1/4 fromeast and west, at the height of the centre line, are ofminimum width without visible haze.

4. Adjust the FOCUS 2 potentiometer (middle potmeter,see Fig. 8-1) until the horizontal and vertical lines at 1/4from north and south, at the height of the centre line, areof minimum width without visible haze.

CL 16532044_013.eps090501

Large Signal panel (LSP)

SS

B

V.SHIFTCINCH SCART

TUNER 3642

1502

5430

Focus 2Focus 1

ScreenVG2

LOT

Warning

All alignmentsare on hot-part !

A

B

C

0V Ref.CL 06532130_014.eps

131000

VCUTOFF [VDC]max.

Electrical AlignmentsGB 88 EM3E8.

8.3 Software Alignments

8.3.1 Introduction

With the software alignments, it is possible to align theGeometry, White Tone and Tuner IF settings.Put the set in the SAM (see chapter 5.2.2). The SAM menuwill now appear on the screen. Select, via 'Alignments', oneof the following submenus:

Figure 8-3

• General: Select this sub-menu to perform generalsoftware alignments.

• Normal Geometry: Select this sub-menu to performstandard geometry alignments.

• Super Wide Geometry: Select this sub-menu to performgeometry alignments for the 'Panorama' position in 16:9sets (only valid for wide screen sets). Alignments can beperformed; however, it is better to set values asmentioned below.

• Options: Select this sub-menu to set the initialisationcodes of the set via text menu’s.

• Option Numbers: Select this sub-menu to set all optionsat once (expressed in two long numbers). The originalfactory settings are printed on a sticker that is placed onthe CRT (inside the set).

• Store: Select this sub-menu to store the performedalignments.

The alignments are explained below in the sequence of thesub-menu.

Note:• Once all alignments/settings have been completed the

item 'Store’ must be selected to record all the values inthe permanent memory of the set.

• If the Option codes have been changed and stored, theset has to be switched 'OFF' and 'ON' using the mainsswitch to activate the new settings (when switching viaStandby, the option code settings are NOT read by themicroprocessor).

• If an empty EAROM (permanent memory) is detected, allsettings are set to pre-programmed default values.

• A built-in test pattern can be called up in various sub-menus. The test pattern generator can be switched onusing the item 'Test pattern on/off'. The test pattern onlyappears AFTER the specific alignment has beenselected. The test patterns are generated by theTeletext-IC (OTC).

8.3.2 'General' alignments

DriveMethod 1 (with colour analyser):1. Select ‘Test pattern’ and turn it ‘On’. You will get a white

block in middle of the image now.2. Select 'Cathode' and adjust the set to the correct light

output. This setting depends on the picture tube size and

brand. See table ‘Cathode parameter’ for the colouranalyser readings.

3. Select ‘Tint’ and set it to one of the three colourtemperatures (‘Cool’, ‘Normal’ or ‘Warm’)

4. Set the white levels according to the values in the table‘White levels’.

Figure 8-4

Figure 8-5

Method 2 (without colour analyser):1. Without having a colour-analyser one can set some

parameters. This is the next best solution. The setting-parameters are average values coming from production(statistics).

2. Select 'Cathode' and enter the value '15' (for all picturetubes).

3. Select ‘Tint’ and set it to one of the three colourtemperatures (‘Cool’, ‘Normal’ or ‘Warm’).

4. Set the ‘Red’, ‘Green’ and ‘Blue’ parameters according tothe values in table ‘Tint settings’.

5. ‘Red BL offset’: herewith the Black Level can be alignedvery precise. Default value is 7.

6. ‘Green BL offset’: herewith the Black Level can bealigned very precise. Default value is 6.

Figure 8-6

Luminance delaysWith this alignment you place the luminance informationexactly on the chrominance information (brightness ispushed onto the colour). Use a colour bar/grey scale patternas test signal.• Lum. Delay Pal: Apply a PAL colour bar/grey scale

pattern as a test signal. Adjust this parameter until thetransients of the colour part and black and white part ofthe test pattern are at the same position.

• Lum. Delay Secam: Apply a SECAM colour bar/greyscale pattern as a test signal. Adjust this parameter untilthe transients of the colour part and black and white partof the test pattern are at the same position.

• Lum. Delay Bypass: apply a NTSC colour bar/greyscalepattern as a test signal. Adjust this value until thetransients of the colour and black & white part of the testarea are at the same position.

EHT compensationFixed setting: 5

A l i g n m e n t s

G e n e r a l >N o r m a l G e o m e t r y >S u p e r W i d e G e o m e t r y >O p t i o n s >O p t i o n N u m b e r s >S t o r e >

CL 16532044_040.eps150501

��

��

��

��

CL 16532044_090.pdf120601

��

��

� ��

! ��" ��

#$%&'�()* � �" +

CL 16532044_091.pdf120601

��

δδδδ�� δδδδ��

� , �" -�

� �

� -� � ,��

CL 16532044_092.pdf120601


Soft clipperFixed setting:Pwl + 0%

Luma gainFixed setting:1

IF AFCSupply, via an external video generator (e.g. PM5518), a TVsignal with a signal strength of at least 1 mV and a frequencyof 475.25 MHz. Use system BG if possible, otherwise matchthe system of your generator with the received signal in theset.

Alignment procedure:1. Go to the 'Installation' menu.2. Select 'Manual installation'.3. Tune the TV-set to the system and frequency described

above via 'Search' - '475' - 'OK'.4. If the frequency, showed in the line 'Fine tune', is

between 475.18 MHz and 475.31 MHz, you don't need tore-adjust the ‘IF AFC’.

5. If not, adjust the frequency in the 'Fine tune' line to475.25 MHz and 'Store' the program (this is veryimportant because this will disable the AFC algorithm).

6. Now go to the SAM and select 'Alignments' - 'General' -'IF AFC'.

7. During the 'IF AFC'-parameter adjustment, one can seeOSD feedback in the top of the screen. This OSDfeedback can give 4 kind of messages:

Figure 8-7

The first item (‘In’ or ‘Out’) informs you whether you are in orout the AFC-window.The second item (‘High’ or ‘Low’) informs you about whetherthe AFC-frequency is too high or too low.1. First you must align the 'IF AFC'-parameter such that you

come into the AFC-window (= 'In')2. Then you must look for the point where the 'IF AFC'-

parameter changes from ‘High’ to ‘Low’. This level is thevalue you are looking for.

3. After adjustment, 'Store' the value.4. Now return to the 'Installation' menu.5. Select 'Manual Installation' - 'Search' - '475' - 'OK' and

'Store'. This will set the AFC 'on' again.

Service tip: If you do not trust the frequency accuracy of yourservice generator, connect it to a ‘good’ TV set and check itwith the 'Fine tune'-line.

Tuner AGC1. Set the external pattern generator to a colour bar video

signal and connect the RF output to the aerial input. Setthe amplitude to 10 mV and set the frequency to 475.25MHz.

2. Connect a DC multimeter between pin 1 and theshielding of the Tuner (item 1200 on the LSP).

3. Adjust the ‘TUNER AGC’ value (default value is 25) withthe LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys until the voltage at pin 1 ofthe tuner lies between 3.8 and 2.3 V.

4. ‘Store’ the alignment.

Blend intensityUse this alignment when you replace the microcontroller orthe HOP. It aligns the level of transparency of the menu-picture blended into the main-picture.1. Position the BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST and COLOUR

setting in the middle position (picture-menu).2. Apply a signal with a 100 % white video-pattern.3. Connect an oscilloscope to pin 8 of connector 1298 of the

CRT panel and measure the Red output level.4. Align the 'Blend intensity' parameter such, that the

blended signal is 65 % of the black-white amplitude. Inpractice this is about 1.3 V (blended signal) versus 2 V(full white signal).

5. The parameter can be adjusted in between 0 and 31.

Adjust Peak White LimiterEnter value ‘4’ for all picture tubes.

Vg2 Test PatternIn this sub-menu, you can turn ‘On’ the OSD feedback for theVg2 alignment (see chapter 8.2.1).

8.3.3 'Normal Geometry' alignments

IntroductionUse for all geometry alignments, an external patterngenerator with a geometry pattern (e.g. crosshatch).See figure below for the correct alignments.

Figure 8-8

Warning: The use of the 'Internal Test Pattern' will, at thismoment, lead to a mis-alignment of the picture geometry. Souse an external generator with a geometry pattern (e.g.

� �!"��" � �!#�$��%��&��#��

./0 1234

56 1234

In Low

./0 ;<=

CL 16532044_093.pdf120601

CL 16532044_022.eps140501

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

VERT. SLOPE

VERT. SHIFT

VERT. AMPLITUDE

V.S-CORRECTION

HOR. SHIFT

HOR. AMPLITUDE

E/W PARABOLE

UPPER E/W CORNER

LOWER E/W CORNER

E/W TRAPEZIUM

HOR. PARALLELOGRAM

HOR. BOW


crosshatch) for a correct geometry alignment. Use the'Internal Test Pattern' only for the 'Vertical slope' alignment.

V. slopeThis alignment is meant to align the zero crossing of theframe deflection to the mechanical middle of the picture tube.1. Set 'Test Pattern’ to ‘On' (read warning above).2. Set the 'V. S-correction' value to ‘0’ all sets (the

boundary-stripes of the test pattern should be positionedon the edge of the picture tube).

3. Align ‘V. slope’ (when aligning, the lower half of thepicture is blanked) such, that the middle line of the testpattern is matched with the edge of the pattern transientin the middle of the picture.

4. Push the 'MENU' button to return to the previous menu.

Vertical alignment1. Use 'V. amplitude' to align the vertical amplitude so that

the entire test pattern is visible.2. Set 'V. shift' to value ‘32’.3. Connect a voltmeter (VDC) between R3624 and ‘hot’

ground.4. Adjust the DC voltage to ‘0’ with potmeter R3642.5. Use 'V. shift' again to align the test pattern vertically in the

middle.6. Repeat the the alignment if necessary.

Horizontal alignment1. Use 'H. amplitude' to align the horizontal amplitude so

that the entire test pattern is visible.2. Use 'H. shift' to align the picture horizontally in the

middle.3. Repeat the 'H. amplitude' alignment if necessary.

Note: In case the horizontal linearity in wide-screen mode isout of tolerance, add a ‘DC-shift correction’ panel (3104 32806230) to connector 1419 of the DAF-panel [ I ]. Be sure toswitch ‘off’ the set first.On the DC-shift panel, cut diode 6433 for correction to theright or diode 6432 for correction to the left.Caution: never plug in a not pre-aligned module in a set !!!

East/west alignment1. Use 'East/West Parabola' to align the vertical lines until

straight.2. Use 'Upper East/West corner' to align the vertical lines in

the upper corners until straight.3. Use 'Lower East/West corner' to align the vertical lines in

the lower corners until straight.4. Use ‘East/West Trapezium’ to align for a rectangular.5. Use 'Horizontal Parallelogram’ to align for straight

vertical lines if necessary.6. Use ‘Horizontal Bow' to correct the E/W parabola such,

that it becomes symmetrical. Default value is ‘31’.7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if necessary.

8.3.4 'Super wide geometry' alignments (only for widescreensets)

Note: The header of this paragraph and also the menu’s aresomewhat misleading. We only need to set the followingvalues (if the normal geometry alignment has beenperformed correctly):1. For ‘V. shift’ use the default value 33.2. For ‘V. amplitude’ use the default value 25.3. ‘V. S-Correction’, enter value of 'normal geometry'

alignment.4. ‘H. amplitude’, enter value of 'normal geometry'

alignment subtracted by 1.5. ‘East/west Parabola’, enter value of 'normal geometry'

alignment.

8.4 Option Settings

8.4.1 Introduction

The microprocessor communicates with a large number ofI2C ICs in the set. To ensure good communication and tomake digital diagnosis possible, the microprocessor has toknow which ICs to address. The presence / absence of thesespecific ICs (or functions) is made known via the optioncodes.

You can set the ‘hardware related’ options via the SAM -‘Alignments’ - ‘Options’ or ‘Option Numbers’ menu.You can set the ‘software related’ options via the SAM -‘Dealer Options’ menu .

After you have changed the option(s), save them via the'Store' command.

The new option setting is only active after the TV is switchedOFF and ON again via the mains switch (the EAROM is thenread out again).


8.4.2 Options

Select this sub-menu to set the initialisation codes (= options)of the set via text menu’s.

Figure 8-9

Menu-item Subjects Options Physically in the set

Aux type None Feauture not present.Yes Text Dual Screen present

Dual screen/PIPText Dual Screen

No Text Dual Screen not presentYes Teletext presentTXTNo Teletext not presentYes NextView setNextView presentNo NextView not setFlashram Flash-RAM present

Teletext/EPG

NextView typeNo Flashram Flash-RAM presentYes Easylink Plus setCommunication Easylink PlusNo Easylink Plus not set4:3 4:3 picture tubeCRT Type16:9 16:9 picture tubeYes Frame rotation circuitry present (diagram A5)Picture RotationNo Frame rotation circuitry not presentYes Dynamic focus (DAF) present (diagram I)Dynamic focusNo Dynamic focus (DAF) not presentYes

Picture Tube

One Point ControlNoEco PROZONIC not presentProzonic PROZONIC presentFalconic FALCONIC present

Featurebox type

1050i/1250i Progressive scan mode2Field memories3Yes Lightsensor presentLightsensorNo Lightsensor not presentYes PALplus module presentPALplusNo PALplus module not presentYes Not valid for EuropeCombfilterNoYes LTP presentPicture improvementNo LTP not presentYes PICNIC presentPicnicNo PICNIC not presentYes In normal operation: YesPicnic AGCNo During ‘Drive’ alignments: NoYes

Video repro

Signalling bitsNoYes 3rd EURO connector present (diagram H)External 3No No 3rd EURO connector presentYes 4th EURO connector present

Source Selection

External 4No No 4th EURO connector presentNoneDolbyPro LogicCorded Passive surroundbox presentVirtual Virtual Dolby (without rear speakers)

Rear speakers

Cordless Active surroundbox presentFL9 Monitor Modern design with only tweeters at both sides (monitor look)FL9 DAS Modern design with full range speakers at both sides

Acoustic system

FL12 Soft design with full range speakers at both sidesYesVirtual DolbyNoOn Automatic Volume Limiter on

Audio Repro

AVLOff Automatic Volume Limiter offYes Heatsink present on CRT/SCAVEM panel (diagram F)Heatsink PresentNo Heatsink not present on CRT/SCAVEM panel (diagram F)UV1316

Miscellaneous

Tuner typeTEDE9

CL 16532044_041.eps150501


8.4.3 Option numbers

Select this sub-menu to set all options at once (expressed intwo long numbers).

An option number (or ‘option byte’) represents a number ofdifferent options. When you change these numbers directly,you can set all options very fast. All options are controlled viaeight option numbers.

When the EAROM is replaced, all options will require a re-setting. To be certain that the factory settings are reproducedexactly, you must set both option number lines. You can find

the correct option numbers on a CRT sticker inside the TVset.

Example: The CRT sticker in the 32PW8870 gives thefollowing option numbers:04866 04384 08001 0001612407 00001 00000 00071The first line indicates the hardware options 1 to 4, thesecond line is reserved for the software options.Every 5-digit number represents 16 bits (so maximumnumber can be 65536 if all options are set).

When all the correct options are set, the sum of the decimalvalues of each Option Byte (OB) will give the option number.

Figure 8-10

OB Bit Option name Settings (given in decimal values) Option number0123

Cabinet 0 = FL6 (n/a)2 = FL8 (n/a)4 = FL9 Monitor6 = FL11 (n/a)

1= FL7 (n/a)3 = FL9 DAS5 = FL10 (n/a)7 = FL12

0

6 AVL 0 = Off 64 = On

Sum OB0

1 Sum OB12 0 CTI 0 = Off 1 = On Sum OB2

0 Auto TV 0 = Off 1 = On12

Auto Store Mode 0 = None4 = TXT Page

2 = PDC/VPS6 = PDC/VPS/TXT Page

34 Picture Mute 0 = Off 16 = On5 Demo 0 = Off 32 = On6 Virgin 0 = Off 64 = On

12 TXT Preference 0 = TOP 4096 = FLOF

3

13 TXT Region 0 = East 8192 = West

Sum OB3

02 China IF 0 = Off 4 = On3 Tuner 0 = Philips 8 = Alps4 TXT 0 = Off 16 = On

4

5 China TXT 0 = Off 32 = On

Sum OB4

0 EXT3 0 = Off 1 = On1 EXT4 0 = Off 2 = On

45

Dual Screen 0 = None32 = Dual Screen

16 = PIP

6 TXT/EPG/DS 0 = Off 64 = On7 Aux. Headph. Sound 0 = Off 128 = On8 Aspect Ratio 0 = 4:3 1 = 16:99 Tilt 0 = Off 512 = On10 DAF 0 = Off 1024 = On11 One Point Control 0 = Off 2048 = On12 Heat Sink 0 = Off 4096 = On13

5

14 Home Cinema 0 = Off 16384 = On

Sum OB5

01 Dolby ProLogic 0 = Off 2 = On2 Virtual Rear Spkrs 0 = Off 4 = On3 Cordless Rear Spkrs 0 = Off 8 = On4 Dolby Digital 0 = Off 16 = On5 Virtual Dolby 0 = Off 32 = On

8 P50 Easylink 0 = Off 256 = On

12 EPG 0 = Off 4096 = On

6

13 EPG Type 0 = Type 2 8192 = Type 2C3

Sum OB6

012

Featurebox 0 = Eco2 = Melzonic (n/a)

1 = Prozonic3 = Falconic

3 Comb Filter 0 = Off 8 = On4 PALplus 0 = Off 16 = On5 Field Memories 0 = 2 memories 32 = 3 memories6 Light Sensor 0 = Off 64 = On7 Luma Trans. Proc. 0 = Off 128 = On8 PICNIC 0 = Off 256 = On9 PICNIC-AGC 0 = Off 512 = On1011 LNA 0 = Off 2048 = On12 WSS 0 = Off 4096 = On

7

13 Time Constant 0 = Normal 8192 = Fast

Sum OB7

CL 16532044_042.eps150501


8.4.4 Dealer Options

Menu name Subjects Opt ions Physically in set

Yes CTI enabledPicture CTINo CTI disabledYes Blue mute active in case no picture detectedBlue MuteNo Noise in case of no picture detectedYes TV starts up once with language selection menu after mains

switch on for the first time (virgin mode)Virgin Mode

No TV does not starts up once with language selection menu aftermains switch on for the first time (virgin mode)

None Autostore mode disabled (not in installation menu)PDC-VPS Autostore mode via ATS (PDC/VPS) enabledTXT page Autostore mode via ACI enabled

Auto Store Mode

PDC-VPS-TXT Autostore mode via ACI or ATS enabledYes Demo menu enableDemo Menu EnableNo Demo menu disableYes Auto TV mode enabled

Personal

Auto TVNo Auto TV mode disabledTOP Preference to TOP TeletextTXT PreferenceFLOF Preference to FLOF TeletextWest TXT characters for non -/58 sets

Teletext

East/West TXTEast TXT characters for -/58 sets

CL 16532044_043.eps150501

Circuit Descriptions and Abbreviation ListGB 94 EM3E9.

9. Circuit Descriptions and Abbreviation List

Index of this chapter1. Introduction2. Block diagram3. Power supply4. Control5. Tuner & IF6. Video: High-end Input Processor7. Video: Feature box8. Video: High-end Output Processor9. Synchronisation10. Horizontal deflection11. Vertical deflection12. Audio13. Teletext / NexTView14. CRT / SCAVEM / Rotation15. Software related features16. Abbreviation list

9.1 Introduction

The EM3 Europe is a higher specified chassis as the EM2Europe. EM stands for Eco-MG, 3 for an indication that thisset is higher specified as the EM2E. So EM2E is a knownchassis with Digital Scan, EM3E is set with Natural Motion,EM4E will be the EM3E set inclusive a Digital Receptionboard. -Differences between the EM3E versus EM2E:– the start-up method is much more simple (no POR-bit

anymore)– the set has an advanced Standby Power Supply,

including MOSFET-switches for making Semi-standby(needed for Easylink and digital reception in future)

– added features as Natural Motion, EPG, LTP andupgraded Auto-TV

– the sound amplifiers have symmetrical supply voltagesnow. The IC is changed from TDA2616 to TDA7490(class-D amplifier, needing very little cooling)

– the vertical amplitude hardware alignment is changed toa software alignment via the SAM menu

– the vertical shift alignment is split into a hardware and asoftware alignment (needed due to spread)

– the Frame drive signals from the HOP are symmetrical.

The architecture consist of a conventional large signal panel(LSP) and a small signal board (SSB) module, placed into aso called SIMM-connector (Standard Interface, 80 pins).

The LSP is built up very conventional, with hardly any surfacemounted components on the copper side. Similar with theEM2E (but different as with the MG-chassis), the EM3E LSPhas a very large 'hot' part, including both deflection coils.

The SSB is a high tech module (2 sides reflow technology,full SMC) with very high component density and completeshielding for EMC-reasons. Despite this, it is designed insuch a way, that repair on component level still is possible.To achieve this, attention was paid to:• The position of service test lands: most of them are at the

Tuner side.• Accessibility (Tuner side). If there are still problems with

the accessibility, one can order an extension board (seeparts list).

• Clearance around surface mounted ICs (for replacing).• Detailed diagnostics and fault finding is possible via

ComPair.

Attention: During the first 4 to 6 months of production, theEM3E set-software will be integrated into a Flash-RAM onthe SSB. After that period, a Mask-ROM will be used. WhichIC is used is not of interest for Service, however for bothsolutions it means that Service Workshops must be equipped

with dedicated (de) solder equipment for exchanging theseICs.In case one must replace a Flash-RAM or a Mask-ROM in thefield, the Dealer will receive always an up-to-date Flash-RAM.

Warning: Be aware that half of the LSP-circuitry is 'hot',including the deflection coils.

Circuit Descriptions and Abbreviation List GB 95EM3E 9.

9.2 Block Diagram

Figure 9-1

The Tuner (item 1200) is a PLL tuner and delivers the IF-signal, via audio & video SAW-filters, to the HIP (High-endInput Processor). The HIP has the following functions:• IF modulation.• Video source- and record select.• Colour decoder.• Synchronisation.

Three SCART-connectors can be used:– SCART1 is fully equipped,– SCART2 is meant for VCR. Pin 10 is used for Easylink

and there is a possibility for Y/C in. The CVBS-out on pin19 is meant for WYSIWYR (What You See Is What YouRecord).

– SCART3 is a CVBS and audio L/R input.

The HIP delivers YUV and sync signals to the PICNIC. ThisIC takes care of:• Analogue to Digital conversion and vice versa.• 50 to 100 Hz conversion.• Panorama mode.• Noise reduction.• Dynamic contrast.

The ‘2fH features’-block in the diagram gives several options:– for Digital Scan the PROZONIC is required– for Natural Motion the FALCONIC is required.

After the PICNIC the, now 100 Hz, YUV- and H/V-signals arefed to the HOP (High-end Output Processor). This IC handlesthe video control and geometry part. The RGB-signals forTXT/OSD (from the �P) are also inserted via the HOP. Thevideo part delivers the RGB signals to the CRT-panel and the

geometry part delivers the H-drive, V-drive and also a drive-signal for rotation.

Both deflection circuits are 'hot' and located on the LSP. Theyare driven by the HOP. To make a galvanic separation, theLine Drive is driven via transformer 5410 and the FrameDrive via transformer 5621.The horizontal output stagegenerates some supply voltages and the EHT-, focus- andVg2-voltages.

The RGB amplifiers on the CRT-panel are integrated in oneIC and are supplied with 200 V from the LOT.The SCAVEM circuit modulates transitions of the Luminance(Y) signal on the horizontal deflection current, giving asharper picture.

The sound part is built around the MSP34xx (Multi-channelSound Processor) for IF sound detection, sound control andsource selection. Dolby decoding is also done by the MSP.Amplification is done via a ‘class D’ integrated poweramplifier IC, the TDA7490.

The microprocessor, called OTC (OSD, Teletext and Control)takes care of the analogue TXT input- and output processing.The OTC, ROM and RAM are supplied with 3.3 V, which isderived from the +5V2STANDBY.The NVM (Non Volatile Memory) is used to store the settings,one Flash-RAM contains the set software, the other Flash-RAM (7012) is for EPG and the DRAM is used for storing theTeletext pages.

In EM3E there is a separate Standby Supply, in order toreduce the Standby power consumption. During Standby, the

CL 16532044_014.eps160501

VERT

HORZ

ROTATION

CRT+

SCAVEM

SCAVEM

RGB

TDA9330TDA9178

HIPIFFILTER

TUNER

EXTI/O

TOPCNTRL

KEYBRD

POWERON/OFF

TDA932XSAWUV13XX

PICNIC

(FBX)

SAA4978

RGB

TILT

COLD HOT

HFB

FRAMEDRIVE-

FRAMEDRIVE+

CVBS-TXT

VIF

SIF

IF

SC

E/W

YUV

HDHA/ VA

E/W

FLASHRAM (EPG)

NVM(PROGRAM)

DRAM(TXT)

FLASHRAM (SW)

OTC(µP)

SAA5801

MSP

MSP34XX TDA7490

VIDEO

AUDIO

IRRECEIVER

SUPPLY 5V2 STANDBY

VBAT (141V)

VSOUND (+/-16V)

EHT

180V

VTUN

+11V

+8V

+5V

SIF

AM

TDA7490

NJM4556

L/R

HP

L/R

HP

SW/C

RGB-TXT

HFB

VD100

HD100

YUV100

VSYNC

VSYNC

HOPTOPIC

2fHfeat

MAINS


Main Supply is switched ‘off’ (via TS7529). A relay (1550) isused to switch the Degaussing circuit. It is switched ‘on’ afterset start-up and switched ‘off’ by the �P after 12 s.The Main Supply, an SMPS that is based on the 'down-converter' principle, generates the 141 V (VBAT) and the +/-16 V for the audio part. Difference with former MG-sets is thatVBAT is not mains isolated ('hot') and is alignment free.

9.3 Power Supply (diagram A1 & A2)

The power supply has a number of main functions:• Mains harmonic filter.• Degaussing picture tube.• Standby power supply.• Main supply.

9.3.1 Mains Harmonic Filter (diagram A1)

Figure 9-2

The mains harmonic filter has 2 functions: to prevent thathigh frequency signals (harmonics) are transferred into themains and to protect the set from lightning damage.

C2507 prevents that the high frequency signals, generatedby the set, are conveyed into the mains (it forms a short-circuit).

In case of a lightning surge between the 2 phases (differentialmode) the energy is immediately bled away through the VDR(R3509) to the other phase.In case of a lightning surge on both phases of the mains inrelation to the aerial earth, the filter acts as a high resistance(UEMK=L * dI/dt), as a result of which the voltage across coilL5503/04 increases. A spark gap (1590) prevents that thevoltage increases too much, which would lead to a damagedcoil. When ignited, the current will be discharged via thisspark gap.Resistor R3500 is used for limiting the inrush-current.

9.3.2 Degaussing (diagram A1)

The 5V2 is present, as soon the set is switched 'on' via themains switch. As the ‘DEGAUSSING’ signal from theprocessor (OTC) is ‘low’, transistor 7528 will conduct andrelay 1550 is activated. Initially a considerable current willflow, via PTC 3516, through the degaussing coil. The PTCwill heat up, resistance will rise and the current will decayrapidly. The OTC makes the ‘DEGAUSSING’ signal ‘high’after 12 s, which will switch the relay ‘off’.

9.3.3 Standby power supply (diagram A2)

PrincipleThis power supply is of a SOPS type (Self-Oscillating PowerSupply) and is regulated by the controlled switching of anoscillator. It uses the so-called 'Flyback' principle:

Figure 9-3

• After closing switch 'S', the current ID will increase linearin time. The magnetic energy in the primary coil is directlyproportional with the self-inductance of the coil andcurrent ID (thus with the time the switch is closed). Thevoltage polarity at the secondary winding is negative(due to different winding direction), meaning that diode Dwill block. Capacitor C will discharge via RL, UOUT willdecrease.

• Opening switch 'S' will generate a counter-e.m.f. in theprimary winding, trying to maintain current ID. Throughthis the polarity of the secondary voltage will inverse. Themagnetic energy, stored in the coil, will now betransformed to the secondary side. Diode D will nowconduct, capacitor C will be charged and OUT willincrease.

Implementation

Figure 9-4

To apply this on the EM3E (diagram A2): replace switch 'S'by FET TS7102, coil L by L5101/L5100, diode D by D6111and C by C2104.– Time interval t0 - t1: After switching ‘on’ the TV-set, the

gate of MOSFET TS7102 will be high (max. 15 V due tozener diode D6105). This will drive the FET intosaturation (UDS = 0 V). The DC-voltage UMAINS will betransposed across the primary winding of L5101 (3, 5),resulting in a linear increasing current through this coil.The voltage across the co-coupled coil (1, 2) is alsopositive and will keep the FET into conductivity viaC2101, R3103/3105/3102 and R3117 for some time.The self-induction of the coil and the magnitude of thesupply voltage (+375 V) determine the slope of theprimary current. The maximum current is determined bythe time the FET stays into conductance (t0 - t1). Thistime is directly determined by the voltage across R3108/

CL 16532044_020.eps140501

2507mains 3521

4M7

1501

1590

3501

9503

Mains harmonicdiversity

3551

21

34

V

9504

9504

+375V

-

- +

2516

2537

3500

5502

5511 or 5516

3

1

1

2

4

3

2

5503 or5504

96532156_020.eps210100

+

-

-

+

-

-+

+

RL

DId

Uout

C+

C+

375V

S

RL

DUout

375V

S

Isec

CL 16532044_019.eps160501

31031K

31051K

311322R

3124 6122

68R 3V9

RL

7101

610515V

31021K

311747R

312610K

312515R

7100

310447R

3101

STARTUP

V-START

10M

3127

5K6

3120

10R

31063107

1K 1K

21012n2

5102-13V

6111

6103

UMAINS

UOUT21042m2

D

SG

610615V

3114220R

2109 +2149

6108

3108//3118

+5V2

8

9

HOT COLD

GND-STB

GND-STB

2

1

5

3

2114

7102

610515V

10n

2102

10µ+

UA

UA

UD

UD

UMAIN

ISEC

IPRIM

IPRIM

ISEC

7104

t

t

t

t

N.Usec

ON OFF

t0 t1 t2

5101

3110

2R2

+375V

2111


/R3118 (= 5 �). This voltage is a measure of the currentand if it exceeds 1.4 V, TS7101 will be driven intoconductivity and consequently connects the gate ofTS7102 to earth. The FET will block. The current is: 1.4V / 5 � = 0.28 A. The voltage across the secondarywinding (8,9) will be negative, diodes D6111 and D6107will block.

– Time interval t1 - t2: The sudden current interruption inthe primary coil will induce a counter-e.m.f. that wants tomaintain the current. The voltage on the drain of the FETwill increase. The secondary voltage (8, 9) will becomepositive and will charge C2104 via D6111. All energy thatwas stored in L5101 during t0 - t1 will be transferred intothe load. Due to the transformer principle, a voltage willnow be induced in the primary winding (3, 5) and the co-coupled winding (1, 2). This voltage will be N* USEC (N=winding ratio). The voltage across the co-coupled coil willbe negative, keeping the FET blocked.

– Time t2: At t2, the current through the secondary coil willbe reduced to zero, as C2104 is no longer charged. As aconsequence, the voltages will decay and will changepolarity. The gate of the FET will be again made positive,is driven into conductivity and the cycle starts again.

Feedback and stabilisationThe Standby Power Supply always oscillates at maximumpower. The only limiting factor is the maximum primarycurrent, which has been pre-set with R3108//3118.R3114, R3124, R3113 and zener diode D6122 determineUOUT. If the voltage across R3114 exceeds the thresholdvoltage of the diode of the optocoupler 7104 (� 1 V) or, inother words, UOUT exceeds 5.2 V, the transistor of theoptocoupler will conduct.Transistor TS7100 is now driven, and a negative voltage willbe transposed to the emitter of TS7101. When TS7101conducts, the gate of the FET is at earth potential, forcing theoscillator stop. Due to the load, the secondary voltage OUT willdecrease. At a certain voltage, optocoupler TS7104 will blockand the oscillator will start again.Since there are no capacitors, and there is a highamplification factor in the feedback circuit, the feedback isultra-fast. This is why the ripple on UOUT is minimal. Thenegative supply voltage (-13 V) used in the feedback circuit,originates from the co-coupling coil and is rectified throughD6103.Stabilisation is not affected through duty-cycle control butthrough burst-mode of TS7100.Burst-mode is load dependent. If the power supply is lessloaded, the secondary voltage will have the tendency toincrease more rapidly. If the load on the power supplyincreases, then the oscillator stops less often, right up to themoment that the oscillator is operating continuously:maximum load. If the power supply is now loaded even more,the output voltage will decay. The maximum primary currentset by R3108//3118 determines the maximum load.

ProtectionIf the optocoupler would fail, the secondary voltage willincrease. This would have disastrous consequences sincemany ICs (e.g. OTC, Flash-RAM and DRAM) are fed with this5.2 V. In other words; very expensive repairs would berequired.We already know that the negative supply is directlydependent upon the secondary 5.2 V, as a consequence ofwhich the negative supply will increase proportionally as thesecondary voltage increases.If the negative supply in the mean time reaches -15 V, D6106will start to zener and as a consequence TS7101 will startconducting. Basically, D6106 will take over the stabilisationtask of the optocoupler, however, with a considerablespread: from -13 V to -15 V is a 15 % increase, thus OUT willincrease from 5.2 V to max. 6 V.

Tuner SupplyThe Standby supply produces 2 voltages for the Tuner: +33V(VTUN) and +5VT.• The +33V is the tuning voltage for the Tuner.• The +5VT is derived from the +8V with stabiliser 7911,

and is used to supply the tuner only.

SSB SupplyThere are several voltages going to the SSB: +8V, +5V and+3V3.• The +5V and +(always present) come directly from the

Standby power supply.• The +3V3 is derived from the +5V with stabiliser 7910 (on

the LSP).

9.3.4 Main Supply (diagram A1)

Some important notes on beforehand:• VBAT is not isolated from the main supply ('hot').• VBAT is alignment free.

PrincipleThe Main Power Supply, generates the 141 V (VBAT) and the+/- 16 V for the audio part. It is based on the so-called 'downconverter' principle.

Figure 9-5

• After closing switch 'S', the linear in time increasingcurrent IT, will charge capacitor C.

• Opening switch 'S' will generate a counter-e.m.f. in coil L,trying to maintain current IT. This is possible via diode D(this diode is also called 'freewheel diode'). So afteropening 'S', the magnetic energy stored in coil L will betransferred to electrostatic energy in capacitor C. The VIN

will only supply current during the time that 'S' is closedwhile a constant current is flowing through RL.

• VBAT is directly proportional with VIN and the time that 'S'is closed and reverse proportional with period time 'T'. Soby changing the duty cycle, it will be possible to controlVBAT.

96532156_022.eps060100

RL

IT

IT

VBATVin

S

C

L

RL

ID

ID

VBATVin

S

C

L

Sclosed Sopen

δT

VIN . δT

T

+

+

D

D

VBAT = T


Implementation

Figure 9-6

At start-up of the main supply, C2515 can be assumed asbeing a short-circuit. UAB will be 15 V (R3513, D6510) andUGS of the FET will be +5.4 V. The FET will be driven intosaturation (same as closing switch 'S' ). The drain-current willincrease linear in time. With other words: resistors R3513and R3518 will start the oscillator.The voltage across the co-coupled coil (4, 5) is also positiveand will keep the FET into conductivity.

The drive concept of the MOSFET TS7504 has changed(compared to the EM2E chassis). In EM2E, TS7502 was ahigh-voltage semiconductor, in EM3E it is changed to a low-voltage semiconductor. The added opto-coupler 7505 isused to bridge the different voltage levels.Via this opto-coupler, the DC-current through R3504 isinfluenced. The changed current through R3504, changesthe VBE of TS7502, which will influence the drive of MOSFETTS7504 (= switch ‘S’ in Fig. 5).

The sudden current interruption in the primary coil, willinduce a counter-e.m.f. that wants to maintain the current viathe 'freewheel' diode D6508. This current is linear decreasingin time and as it is also flowing through R3414//R3415,TS7502 will be blocked after a certain time period. The gateof the FET will be again made positive, is driven intoconductivity and the cycle starts again.

For safety reasons, transistor TS7530 is added as a back-upsolution for TS7502. If B-E of TS7502 is shorted, TS7530takes over its function.

Stabilisation of VBATThe output voltage VBAT is determined by: VBAT = VIN * TON /(TON + TOFF) = VIN * duty-cycle.To stabilise the output voltage, a feedback loop isimplemented, which will reduce TON when VBAT increasesand vice versa.

Via a voltage divider, excisting of (1 %) resistors R3507,R3510 and R3527, a voltage of 2.5 V (when VBAT = 141 V) isfed to the input of precision shunt regulator 7506. Thisregulator will conduct, a current will flow through the diodepart of the opto-coupler 7507. The base of TS7502 will nowbe set at a certain positive voltage. As this transistor switchesthe FET TS7504 on and off, this circuit can determine theduty-cycle.E.g. when the load increases, VBAT will decrease. As aconsequence, the input voltage of regulator 7506 willdecrease, resulting in a lower current. Via opto-coupler 7505

and transistor TS7502, TON of the FET is changed (willincrease). The output voltage VBAT will rise.If the load continues to increase, the regulator will block at acertain moment. TON will is now at maximum value. This isthe point where VBAT will go below 141 V and, at furtherincreasing load, is switched ‘off’ (the voltage across the co-coupled coil (4, 5) will decrease, due to the increasing load.Therefore the voltage on the gate of TS7504 comes belowthe threshold voltage. The supply switches ‘off’ and anaudible hiccuping can be heard).On the other hand when the load decreases, VBAT will rise. Asa consequence, the input voltage of TS7506 will also rise,resulting in a higher current. This changes the base voltageof TS7502, and through that the TON (will decrease) of theFET. The output voltage VBAT will be reduced.If, for instance, VIN will decrease (e.g. UMAINS is 180 V i.s.o.240 V), the slope of the drain-current will be flattened,through which the FET will be longer into conductance,keeping VOUT constant.If, for any reason, the stabilisation circuit might fail, the outputvoltage VBAT can never exceed 200 V (via D6514). D6514 willform a short-circuit, VBAT will drop and the set will switch off(this will result in an audible hiccuping of the supply).

Switch to ‘Standby’ (via RC)When the set is switched to 'Standby' mode via the RemoteControl, the Main supply is switched ‘off’ by the circuit aroundTS7529 (see diagram A1).During 'on'-state, the Main supply is fed with line pulses viathe ‘SUP-ENABLE’ line. They are rectified and smoothed viaD6517, D6516 and C2530 and fed to TS7529. Because theyare less than -13 V, this transistor is blocked. When thesepulses are stopped, TS7529 will be saturated and TS7502will switch ‘off’. This will switch ‘off’ the Main supply.

Set to ‘On’ (via ‘SUP-ENABLE’)Via the ‘STANDBY’ command from the OTC, the MOSFETS7141 and 7131 are switched ‘on’. When the +5V and +8V aresensed by the OTC, a command is given to the HOP to startthe drive (via I2C).When this is sensed via the ‘SUP-ENABLE’ line (at the baseof line transistor TS7421), the main supply is switched ‘on’via TS7529.

Audio SupplyThe pulses on the secondary winding of L5506 are rectifiedby D6535 (+16 V) and D6536 (-16V), and smoothed byC2542 and C2543.

D

A

SG

3518

3512

5V66515

3514//15

3522

3508

3511

7530

7504

7502650515V

6501

6510

15V

6535

7507

5506

COLDHOT

6536

6530

2503

35131503

2.5A

2512

+16V

-16V2513

141V

5

Vbat

141VVbat375V

7506

3506

3520

33k

3504

35072515

V - MAINS

CL 16532044_030.eps160501

B


9.4 Control (diagram B5)

Figure 9-7

9.4.1 OTC

IntroductionThe SAA5801 (IC7001) is called the OTC (OSD, TXT andControl). In this IC, the microprocessor and the TXT-decoder(level 2.5) are integrated.Some of its functions are:• Set control.• TXT/OSD acquisition.• RGB-outputs to the HOP• Menu blending; for blending the contrast, software

controlled.• I/O-ports for I2C, RC5/RC6, LED, and service modes.• Error code generation.

Data StorageThe software for EM3E can be 2 MB (Megabyte).It is possible to store 1200 TXT pages in IC7007. This is aDRAM of 4 MBit and this IC is also used to store data of aworking set.For EPG a Flash-RAM (7012) is used.The Non Volatile Memory IC7011 is a 4 kB versionM24C32W6.

Power SupplyAll ICs in this part are supplied with 3V3. For this voltage a3V3 stabiliser is used (IC7005).

With the circuitry around TS7003 and 7004 (diagram B5) areset is generated to wake up the OTC (pin 74). During thisreset all I/O pins of the OTC are made ‘high’.

Via pins 105 and 106, the +8 V and the +5 V are sensed. Ifone of them is not present, the Main supply is switched ‘off’(set in protection and the red LED will blink at 3 Hz).The OTC will generate an error code to indicate what waswrong.

OSD/TXTThe horizontal (HD100) and vertical (VSYNC) sync pulses arealso fed to the OTC for stable OSD and TXT.The RGB-outputs (77/78/79) together with fading (pin 80) arefed to the HOP. The fading pin has a double function: it isused for making a transparent menu and as fast-blankingsignal for TXT.

9.4.2 I�C Busses

In the EM3E chassis with OTC-processor there are three I�Cbusses used:• Slow (max. 100 kHz) hardware I�C-bus (called I�C0),

used for the Tuner.• Fast (max. 400 kHz) hardware I�C-bus (called I�C1),

used for all ICs.• Separate short bus (called I�C3) for the Non Volatile

Memory (NVM), to avoid data corruption.

9.4.3 NVM

The Non Volatile Memory contains all set related data thatmust be kept permanently, such as:• Software identification.• Operational hours.• Error-codes.• Option codes.• All factory alignments.• Last Status items for the customer + a complete factory

recall.• Txt featuring (keeping habit watch data).• EPG data.

9.5 Tuner & IF (diagram A8 & B2)

The tuner is I2C controlled, and is capable of receiving off-air,S- (cable) and Hyperband channels:• Low 44 - 156 MHz• Mid 156 - 441 MHz• High 141 - 865 MHz

The tuning is done via I2C. The reference voltage on pin 9 is33 V. This voltage (VTUN) is derived from the secondary sideof the standby supply, via D6134 and R3116//R3115 and a33 V zener diode (D6200). The OTC, together with the HIP,controls the tuning procedure. There is also automaticswitching for the different video systems.

The IF-filter is integrated in a SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave)filter. The type of this filter depends on the receivedstandard(s). There are two SAW filters: one for filteringpicture-IF and a second one for sound-IF. An extra filter(5403), tuned at 40.4 MHz, is necessary for L/L’ sets (with 6.5MHz sound), to suppress the neighbour channel.

The output of the tuner is controlled via an IF-amplifier withAGC-control. This is a voltage feedback from pin 62 of theHIP to pin 1 of the tuner. AGC take-over point is adjusted viathe service alignment mode ’Tuner AGC’. If there is too muchnoise in the picture, it is possible that the AGC setting iswrong. It is also possible that the AGC-setting is mis-aligned,if the picture deforms with a perfect signal. Then the IF-circuitamplifies too much.

The video IF-signal is fed to pins 2/3 of the PLL-controlled IF-demodulator. The voltage controlled oscillator of the PLL is

CL 16532044_016.eps160501

SAA5801

P50-OUT

SEL_IN_2

STATUS SC3

FRONT DETECT

120

A0...A19 D0...D15

CVBS-TXT

7001

5

KEYBOARD 107

+5V 106

+8V 105

91/92

+3V3

113

+5V2 RESET

ON/OFF-LED

74

H, V 83,84

119

117

109

LIGHT SENSOR110

DEGAUSSING115

108

SEL_IN_1103

STANDBY104

POR99

RC5/RC6100

P50-IN97SDM

4006

96SOUND ENABLE95

RESET AUDIO94

RGB, BLENDING77,78,79,80

FRAME81

FLASHEPG

FLASH(SW)

DRAM(TXT)

EEPROMM24C32

NVM

TUNER UV13xx

SAM

4005

+3V3 +RESET

+3V3

+3V3

I2C3+3V3

I2C1

I2C085/86

87/88

slow

fastHIP

HOP

MSP 3415/3451/3411

FBX PICNIC

DNR MEMORY

TOPIC

NVM(PROG)


adjusted via the service menu ‘IF AFC’. If the alignment iscorrect, the displayed frequency in the installation menu isthe same as the applied frequency from a generator. Theexternal coil L5408 connected between pins 7/8 is used asreference.The demodulated IF-video signal is available at pin 10 of theHIP. In this video signal, there is a rest of the sound carrier,which is filtered out by the sound trap 1407.Then the signal is again fed to the HIP on pin 12, where thegroup delay is corrected, dependent on the standard that isreceived.The CVBS-signal is available at pin 13 for further processingin the set. Via TS7322, the signal is supplied to EXT1(monitor out) and again back into the HIP (pin 14) to thesource/record selection.

To realise Quasi Split Sound (QSS), the IF-signal is fed to theHIP on pin 63/64 via SAW-filter 1405. The FM (or AM for L-norm) -modulated signal is available on pin 5 and is fed to theaudio demodulator MSP34xx (7651).

9.6 Video: High-end Input Processor (HIP,diagram B2))

In the EM3E, the HIP TDA932xH is used, which contains thefollowing functions:• IF demodulation.• Group delay correction.• AFC signal generation, used to track drifting transmitters.• Sound carrier re-generation (SIF).• AM demodulation.• Sync acquisition, delivering HA and VA.• Switching off IF-filtering.

9.6.1 Inputs

The HIP has various inputs:• Full matrix switch with:

– 2 CVBS inputs– 2 Y/C (or additional CVBS) inputs– 1 CVBS front end input.

• Two RGB inputs and 2 status-inputs

The input signals from the Front I/O are fed to the HIP, andfront detection is fed to the OTC.• EXT1 is full SCART: thus CVBS and RGB. The RGB-

selection is done in the HIP.• EXT2 is meant for VCR and has therefore some

additional signals in relation to EXT1 but no RGB. EXT2has also the possibility for Y/C_in and Easylink-Plus(P50). Y_in is with pin 20 and Chroma in with pin 15.Easylink is handled via pin 10 of the SCART and this is abi-directional communication.

• EXT3 is meant for CVBS input only.

9.6.2 Outputs

One can select three, separate switchable, outputs:• 1 YUV-output, which is fed to the PICNIC• 2 CVBS outputs, one for Teletext Dual Screen and the

other for output to EXT2 to have WYSIWYR (What YouSee Is What You Record).

9.6.3 I/O Switching

The external signals are fed directly to the I/O part of the HIPwith status from pin 8 of SCART. On the HIP there are twostatus inputs available (pins 15, 17) with two voltage levels:• 4:3 -> 2.2 V• 16:9 -> 5.5 V

9.6.4 P50

Easylink supports the next features:• Signal quality and aspect ratio matching• One touch play• One touch text• Pre-set download• WYSIWYR• Automatic Standby

With Easylink-Plus (P50+) is added:• Country and language installation• System Standby• Intelligent set top box features• NexTView download• Timer record control• VCR control feature

9.6.5 Video Processing

The sandcastle-pulse of the HIP is not used forsynchronisation. The HOP will generate synchronisationsignal derived from the feature box (PICNIC) signals. If aVCR is connected, there is also an automatic correction forMacroVision. This is active for the external sources and thepre-sets 0, 90-99.The HIP itself (no external voltage) controls the Y/C switch inthe HIP.The chrominance decoder in the HIP is full multi-standard:PAL/SECAM/NTSC.Two different crystals can be connected to the pins 54 & 57without any alignment. The crystals are also used as areference for the synchronisation. A digital control circuit thatis locked to the reference signal of the colour decoderdetermines the start-up of the sync. The original one mayonly replace this crystal. If just a crystal is taken, the internalcapacitance will be different and the effect will be that thereis no colour.In the HIP a sync separation circuit is integrated; the HIPdelivers the HA50 and VA50 to the PICNIC.

9.7 Video: Feature Box (PICNIC and FALCONIC,diagram B3)

9.7.1 Introduction

The basic function of the Feature box (FBX6) is pictureimprovement, and depending on the version, several scanconversion methods are possible. The PICNIC (SAA4978H)is the central key component.In the EM3E-chassis, the feature-box is integrated on theSSB.The PICNIC is used for the 100Hz conversion and has thefollowing functions:• The ADC.• The DAC.• The 100 Hz conversion.• Dual screen compression• The Panorama mode.• Automatic Aspect Ratio Adaptation (AARA)• Colour Transient Improvement (CTI)• The contrast improvement (Dynamic Contrast).All these functions are integrated in one IC: SAA4978H, 160pins QFP

9.7.2 ADC/DAC

Analogue to Digital conversion is done with three identical 9-bit ADC's.Digital to Analogue conversion uses three identical 10-bitDAC's.In the PICNIC there are three 9 bits ADCs present for Y,U,V.For digitising the Y (luminance), 9 bits are used (to realise a


more detailed picture). These 9 bits are only internally used.Via dithering the 9 bits are reduced to 8 bits and this data isstored into memory. The data in the memory is fed back tothe PICNIC and via un-dithering the data is again reproducedto 9 bits for processing.U/V (colour difference signals) is also sampled with 9 bits.These two 9 bit data streams are multiplexed to 4 bits datastreams. As the perception for colours by the human eye isless sensitive as for luminance, this reduction is allowed.

9.7.3 100 Hz Conversion

The main task of the PICNIC is the conversion from 50Hz to100Hz for YUV and HV-sync. In order to remove 'large areaflicker' (especially visible in a white picture), the field-rate ofthe video is doubled by the FBX6. A 50/60 Hz framefrequency is converted to 100/120 Hz. Also the linefrequency (16 kHz) is doubled (32 kHz).Basically, when the video input contains fields A, B etc..., theconversion provides an AABB sequence on the display. Theactual conversion is done in the first Field Memory (byreading it twice at double speed, while writing it once.

Figure 9-8

For extra 100 Hz features, it is possible to add an extra IC tothe PICNIC. This IC, called the ‘Field And Line CONverter IC’(FALCONIC), has three modes:1. 100 Hz (to eliminate field flicker). Only one memory IC

(7714) is used to store one frame. It displays an AABBsequence.

2. Digital Scan (to additional eliminate line flicker).Together with two memory ICs (7714 and 7740), itdisplays an AA’BB’ or ABAB sequence.

3. Natural Motion (to additional eliminate movementjuddering).Together with two memory ICs (7714 and 7740), itdisplays an AB’A’B sequence.

9.7.4 Dual Screen Compression

The PICNIC can provide horizontal video compression up to50 %. The compress mode can be used to display dualscreens with Teletext (only for wide-screen sets).

9.7.5 The Panorama Mode

To fit 4:3 pictures into a 16:9 display, it is possible to apply apanoramic horizontal distortion, to make a screen-fittingpicture without black sidebars or lost video.The centre horizontal gain is programmable and the side gainis automatically adapted to make a screen-fit.

9.7.6 Automatic Aspect Ratio Adaptation (AARA)

This feature uses data from the 'black bar detection circuit' toadapt the vertical and horizontal amplitude to an aspect ratiobelonging to the display, without the black bars.

9.7.7 Colour Transient Improvement (CTI)

At CVBS video signals, the bandwidth of colour signals islimited to 1/4 of the luminance bandwidth. Transientsbetween areas of different colours are therefore not verysharp.The PICNIC can steepen these transients artificially with atime manipulation algorithm.

9.7.8 Dynamic Contrast

To make the contrast (black/white) range wider, Philips hasinvented Dynamic Contrast. It uses the digital memory usedin 100 Hz sets. It measures every A-field (25 x per second),and digitally analyses where on the greyscale most of theimage is located.If it is a relatively dark image, the lighter part of that image isstretched towards white, so that more contrast will becomevisible in that picture.If it is a relatively light image, the darker part of that image isstretched towards black, so that these darker parts will havemore contrast.When the image is in the middle of the greyscale, both darkand light parts are stretched.

9.8 Video: High-end Output Processor (HOP) andTOPIC (diagram B4)

9.8.1 General

The YUV-signals from the PICNIC are fed to the HOP (High-end Output Processor, TDA9330). The video and geometrycontrol parts are integrated in the HOP. Also the RGB-signalsfor TXT/OSD (from the �P), are inserted via the HOP. Thegeometry part delivers the H-drive, EW-drive, V-drive andalso a drive signal for rotation.

The main functions of the HOP are:• Video control (contrast, brightness, saturation, etc.).• Deflection drive.• 2nd RGB interface for OSD/TXT.• Peak White Limiting.• Cut-off control and White Drive (RGB outputs).• Geometry control.The TOPIC (The most Outstanding Picture improvement IC,item 7302, type TDA9178), is an optional IC between thePICNIC and the HOP. It has the following (pictureimprovement) functions:• Luminance Transient Processor (LTP), for detail

enhancement.• Chrominance delay circuitry, to compensate timing

differences between Y and C.• Spectral processor , for improved sharpness and colour

transient improvement (CTI).• Colour vector processor, for skintone correction, green

enhancement and blue stretch.• Measure and detection circuitry, for AutoTV.

CL 16532044_015.eps090501

BUS A BUS

PICNIC/SAA4978H

NATURAL MOTION

BBUS BUS CBUS BUS D

MEM1

MEM2

FALCONIC

I C2

Y FEATY DECU FEATU DECV FEATV DECHD100HAVD100VA

BUS A BUS

PICNIC/SAA4978H

100Hz CONFIGURATION

BBUS BUS CBUS BUS D

MEM1

I C2

Y FEATY DECU FEATU DECV FEATV DECHD100HAVD100VA

7709

7714

7714

7709

77407726

A B

F C


The sandcastle pulse from the HOP is fed to pin 1 of theTOPIC, which is used as reference for timing.

9.8.2 Video Control

After source selection, the HOP controls the signals forSaturation, Contrast and Brightness. Output is RGB again.

9.8.3 OSD/TXT Control

On pins 35 to 38 the RGB and fast blanking from the OTC(OSD and TXT) are inserted. The sync signal VSYNC) isderived from the ‘FRAMEDRIVE-“ signal.

9.8.4 Peak White Limiting

On pin 43 there is a Peak White Limiting signal line (PWL). Ifthe beam current increases, the ‘EHT-info’ voltage willdecrease. Average limiting via R3343/C2333 controls PWL.

9.8.5 Cut-off Control

The following will happen when you switch the TV toStandby:1. The vertical scan is completed.2. The vertical flyback is completed (the horizontal output is

gated with the flyback pulse, so that the horizontal outputtransistor cannot be switched ‘on’ during the flybackpulse).

3. The ‘slow stop’ of the horizontal output is started, bygradually reducing the 'on' time at the horizontal outputfrom nominal to zero (this will take 50 ms).

4. At the same time, the fixed beam current is forced via theblack-current-loop for 25 ms. This is done by setting theRGB outputs to a maximum voltage of 5.6V.

In the EM3E a 'one-point' cut-off control is used:A current of 8 �A (for cut-off) is fed to pin 44 of the HOP. Thisis done with a measurement pulse during the frame flyback.During the 1st frame, 3 pulses are generated to adjust thecut-off voltage at a current of 8 �A. With this measurementthe black level at the RGB-outputs is adjusted.So at start-up there is no monitor pulse anymore. At start-up,the HOP measures the pulses, which come back via pin 44.The RGB-outputs have to be between 1.5 V and 3.5 V. If oneof the outputs is higher than 3.5 V or one of them lower then1.5 V, the RGB-outputs will be blanked.

9.8.6 Geometry control

All geometry control is done via I2C and the data is stored inthe NVM (IC7011) of the SSB.

9.8.7 Deflection Control

Line DriveThe Line drive is derived from an internal VCO of 13.75 MHz.As a reference, an external resonator is used (1301). Theinternal VCO is locked with the HD100-pulse, which comesfrom the PICNIC.The 'PHI-2' part in the HOP receives the HFB_X-RAY_PROT(pin 13) to correct the phase of the Line drive. The EHT-infois supplied to pin 14 (DYN-PHASE-CORR) to compensatepicture breathing depending on the beam current.Note: This is not used in the EM3E, therefore EHT-compensation in the SAM menu is put to zero.

Frame DriveAt pins 1 and 2 the symmetrical frame drive signals areavailable. The VSYNC signal, for synchronisation of the OSD/TXT, is derived from the ‘FRAMEDRIVE-‘ signal.

East/West DriveAt pin 3, the E/W-drive is available. Pin 4 is a feedback inputfor the EHT-info, and is used to prevent pumping of thepicture. The EHT varies also dependent on the beam current.For wide-screen without load this is 31.5 kV and with load(1.5 mA) 29.5 kV.

Frame RotationFor frame rotation, a control voltage is used from pin 25 of theHOP. Frame rotation is only used in wide-screen sets.

9.8.8 Protections

Flash detectionWhen a flash occurs, the EHT-info will become negative veryfast. Via R3316/D6304/D6303, TS7303 starts to conduct.This makes pin 5 of HOP ‘high’. The output (pin 8) isimmediately stopped.If the H-drive stops, then also pin 5 will become ‘low’ again,which will reset the flash detection.A bit (FLS) is set in an output status register, so that the OTCcan see that there was a flash. This FLS-bit will be resetwhen the OTC has read that register.

HFB protectionIf the HFB is not present, it this detected via the HOP. TheOTC puts the TV into protection and reads a register in theHOP. An error code is generated.

9.9 Synchronisation (diagram B2, B3 & B4)

The HIP video processor provide the vertical and horizontalsync pulses VA and HA. They are synchronised with theincoming CVBS signal. Then these pulses are fed to thePICNIC, where they are doubled to be synchronous with the100 Hz picture. The outgoing pulses, VD100 and HD100, arefed to the HOP, which supplies the vertical and horizontaldrive pulses and the 100 Hz (2fH) sandcastle pulse.

The VD100 pulse from the PICNIC is inverted by TS7304 tothe VD signal. The OTC is synchronised on the HFB pulsefrom the CRT and on the VSYNC from the HOP, for thesynchronisation of TXT/OSD/EPG

When no CVBS is offered to the video processor, the VA50

and HA50 pulses are switched ‘off’ by the HIP, and the pulsesare generated by the PICNIC (to assure a stable OSD).


9.10 Horizontal (Line) Deflection (diagram A3)

9.10.1 Principle

Figure 9-9

The HOP (located on the SSB) generates the line-drivepulses (LINEDRIVE1), which have a frequency of 31250 Hz(T = 32 �s).

When the LINEDRIVE1 signal is high, TS7409 and TS7408will conduct. A constant DC voltage will be applied acrossL5410, causing a linear increasing current through this coil.The secondary voltage of L5410 has a negative polarity sothat TS7421 will block. When the set is switched ‘on’, thecurrent through L5410 is supplied by the 5V2 Standby supply(via D6407), and taken over by the +11D voltage (via D6408)of the main supply.

When the LINEDRIVE1 signal becomes low, TS7409 andTS7408 will block. The voltage polarity across the primarywinding of L5410 will invert. The positive voltage on thesecondary winding will now drive TS7421 into conductivity.Because of the storage time of the line transistor (TS7421),L5410 cannot transfer its energy immediately to thesecondary side. This may result in high voltage peaks on thecollector of TS7409 and TS7408. To prevent that thesepeaks will damage the transistors, a 'snubber' circuit (C2414,C2412 and R3411) will suppress them.

When the LINEDRIVE1 signal is high again, the abovedescribed sequence starts again. Circuit L5411 and R3409will increase the switch ‘off’ time of the line transistor.

The line stage is started via a 'slow start' principle. Duringstart-up, the HOP generates line drive pulses with a smallTON and a high frequency (50 kHz). TOFF is constant and TON

is gradually increased until the frequency is 31.25 kHz(normal condition).The time interval from start to normal condition takes about150 ms.When switching off, the same procedure is followed, but nowin reverse order.

9.10.2 Implementation

To explain the operation of the line output stage, we use thefollowing start conditions:• C2433 is charged to max. 141 V (VBAT)• TS7421 is driven into conductivity.

CL 16532044_018.eps140501

3481

6480 2426 6422

2421

7480

ARCPROT

3414

24156406

3406

3431

2430

1417

54212431

141V

141V

7482

3418

3488

HOTCOLD

2425 6423

2432//33//34

6408

64073416

3409

5411

2414

5410

3411

2412

7408

+8VB

+8VS

7409

MAIN SUPPLY +11D

STANDBY SUPPLY +5V2

2492

3407

3487

2420

7421

5430

2417

3417

3486

2

13412

6615

3404

LINEDRIVE 1(HOP)

EW_DRIVE(HOP)

STA

RT

NO

RM

AL

T7421 conducting

TON

TOFF1

2

5

*1

*2

(*1)

(*2)

1

2

1

4

3

LINE DEFL. COIL.

LINEARITYCOIL.

5422

Caused byserial losses inthe line output stage

Linearity Correction

S-correctionX Y X

Deflection centre

X > Y

3 57450-B

8

4

2

1 5

4

63490

3484

3492

7487

7486

3483 3479


Figure 9-10

– Period t1 - t2: When TS7421 is driven into conductivity,the capacitor voltage of 141 V, will be divided acrossbridge-coil L5422 and the deflection coil (connector0317). Due to the chosen inductance values, there will be100 V across the deflection coil and 41 V across L5422.The linear increasing current in the deflection coil willresult in a spot moving from the centre of the picture tubeto the right. The voltage across L5422 will also chargeC2421 (41 V - 0.7 V).

– Period t2 - t3: At the moment the LINEDRIVE signalbecomes high, TS7421 will stop conducting. In the coilsa voltage will be induced, trying to maintain the current.The current through the line deflection coils continues toflow through C2425 and C2421 and the current throughL5422 continues to flow through C2426 and C2421. Theenergy stored in the line deflection coil is passed toC2425, and the energy of L5422 to C2426. Theresonance-frequencies of these 2 LC-circuits define theflyback time of the spot from the right side of the picturetube to the left. On average no current flows throughC2421 and thus the voltage across this capacitorremains constant.

Figure 9-11

– Period t3 - t4: As for the period t2 - t3; but now thecurrent flows in the opposite direction, since the voltageacross C2425 and C2426 is higher than the voltageacross C2433 and C2421.

– Period t4 - t5: The coils want to maintain the negativecurrent and will charge the capacitors negative. Becauseof this, D6422 and D6423 will conduct. The voltage is100 V across the deflection coil and 41 V across L5422.As both diodes conduct, we may consider the voltage tobe constant. A linear current flows with the samechanging characteristics as in period t1 - t2. The spotnow moves from the extreme left of the picture tube to thecentre. Before the current becomes zero, and the spot islocated in the centre of the frame, TS7421 reverts backinto conductivity. First a short negative current will flow.The cycle starts again.

9.10.3 Corrections

Several corrections are necessary to obtain a correct picture.

Linearity CorrectionA constant voltage across the horizontal deflection coilshould result in a linear increasing saw-tooth current. This isnot the case however, as the resistance of the coil is not

negligible. In order to compensate for this, a pre-magnetisedcoil L5421 in series with the deflection coil is used. This coilensures that during time interval t1 - t3 the circuit resistancewill be higher than during t4 - t5.L5421 is called the linearity coil. To avoid self-oscillation,R3431 and C2431 are placed parallel to L5421.See also Figure 9-9-(*1).

S-correctionSince the sides of the picture are further away from the pointof deflection than the centre, a linear saw-tooth current wouldresult in a non-linear image (the centre would be scannedslower than the sides).To solve this, the deflection current for the right- and left sideis reduced.C2433 is charged quadratic during time interval t1 - t2. Leftand right the voltage across the deflection coil decreases,causing the deflection to slow down. In the centre, thevoltage increases and the deflection will be faster.An S-shaped current is superimposed on the saw-toothcurrent. This correction is called ‘finger-length correction’ or’S-Correction’.C2433 is relatively small, as a result of which the saw-toothcurrent will generate a parabolic voltage with negativevoltage peaks. The current also results in a parabolic voltageacross C2421, resulting in the finger-length correction,proportionally increasing with the picture width.The EW-DRIVE signal will ensure the largest picture width inthe centre of the frame. Here the largest correction is applied.The larger the picture width, the higher the deflection currentthrough C2433.See also Figure 9-9-(*2).

E/W-correctionA line, written at the upper- or lower side of the screen, willbe larger at the screen centre when a fixed deflection currentis used. Therefore the amplitude of the deflection currentmust be increased when the spot approaches the screencentre. This is called East/West correction.

The EW drive signal originates in the HOP and is supplied toTS7480 via OpAmp 7450-B and optocoupler TS7482. Theshape of this signal determines the various geometriccorrection parameters:• H amplitude• EW-parabola• EW-corner• EW-trapezium• Horizontal parallelogram• Horizontal bow

TS7480 will charge capacitor C2421 more or less, increasingthe deflection current when reaching the centre of the screen.The moment TS7480 is driven into saturation, C2421 willdischarge during the flyback. As a consequence of whichC2421 must be charged again during the scan via theconduction diode D6422 (as long as C2421 is not charged tothe voltage across L5422, D6422 will conduct).The current in the deflection coil is therefore larger than thecurrent flowing in L5422 (1-2). The voltage across thedeflection coil increases, so the picture width increases.When TS7480 blocks, C2421 will not discharge anymore,and the voltage across C2421 will remain constant.The result is that the voltage across the deflection coil isminimal. The voltage across coil L5422, however, ismaximal. This coil (L5422) consists of a transformer with thefollowing properties:• As the current through the coil 1-2 increases (smaller

picture width), the current through coil 3-4 decreases.Because of the transformer characteristic a highervoltage will be subjected to coil 3-4, which will counteractthe current. The current will diminish even further.

• When the current through coil 1-2 diminishes (largerpicture width), the current through coil 3-4 increases.

CL 96532156_024.eps060199

141V

7421

Line defl.

2433

5422

6423

6422

2425

2426

2421

Defl

t2 t3

5430

141V

7421

Line defl.

2433

5422

6423

6422

100V

141V

41V

2425

2426

2421

IDefl

t2t1

41V

5430

+-

I

2420 2420

CL 96532156_025.eps231299

141V

Line defl.

2433

5422

2425

2426

I Defl

t3 t4

5430

141V

Line defl.

2433

54226422

2425

2426

I Defl

t5t4

5430

100V

141V

41V

+-

7421 7421

2420

6423

6422

6423

2420

2421

41V

2421

41V


Beam-current CorrectionThe ‘EHT-info’ signal at point 10 of the LOT, depends on thevalue of the beam-current and the voltage from dividerR3450, R3451 and C2450. This signal is fed to the HOP totrim the contrast, and to compensate for the changes inpicture-width as a function of the EHT-info, when EHT isdecreased. The ‘EHT-info’ is also used to correct the EW-current.

The ‘DYN-FASE-CORR’ signal, derived from the ‘EHT-info’signal, is fed to the HOP via C2455 and drives a dynamicphase correction necessary because of beam-currentvariations. This is done by regulating TON of the line transistorTS7421.

9.10.4 Secondary Line Voltages

During the blocking time of TS7421, the magnetic energy ofcoil 1 - 5 of the LOT, is transferred to electrical energy in thesecondary winding. Via rectifying and smoothing, the severalsecondary supply voltages are generated, like:• EHT, Focus and Vg2-voltage• +200V for the CRT panel (pin 8 LOT)• +11D for the line deflection (pin 12 LOT)• +13VLOT for the frame deflection (pin 6 LOT)• -15VLOT for the frame deflection (pin 3 LOT)• Filament voltage (pin 9 LOT)

9.11 Vertical (Frame) Deflection (diagram A4)

9.11.1 Frame Stage Drive

Figure 9-12

The HOP drives the frame output stage with a symmetricalsaw-tooth voltage. As the HOP is 'cold' and the frame outputstage is 'hot', they are galvanic isolated. This is done via atransformer (5621). As in the MG-chassis, the HOPgenerates 3 signals needed for the frame output stage:FRAMEDRIVE+, FRAMEDRIVE- and TILT (for rotation).The rotation circuit is kept at the ‘cold’ side of the chassis, toavoid the costs an extra optocoupler.The circuit around IC7440 will amplify this signal and theoutput current will flow through the rotation coil.

9.11.2 Flyback Generator

The frame output stage is supplied via the +13 V and -15 Vcoming from the LOT. The output of the amplifier is 0 VDC, soa coupling capacitor is not required.

During the (forward) scan, a supply of +13 and -15 V issufficient to respond to the slow changing current. Theinternal flyback generator puts a voltage of -15 V on pin 3.Because of the voltage drop over zener diode D6622 (8.2 V),C2622 will be charged to 19 V: being 13 + (15 - 8.2 - 0.7) V.During the flyback scan, the change in current-per-time ismuch larger, so a higher voltage is required. The flybackgenerator will now generate a voltage of +13 V on pin 3.Added to the charge on C2622 this will give a flyback voltageof 32 V (depending on the CRT size, this value can differ).

The amplifier IC (IC7620, pin 5) supplies the saw-toothcurrent to the frame deflection coil. The current through thiscoil is measured via R3620//R3621//R3622 and fed back tothe inverting input of the amplifier.R3624 and C2624 on the output of the amplifier, form a filterfor high frequencies and in that way also preventsoscillations.Peak voltages on the output, e.g. as a result of a possibleflash, are damped by the clamp circuit consisting of D6619,C2627 and R3627. The network consisting of R3625, R3626,R3629 and C2629 form an extra damping circuit.

9.11.3 Protection circuits

Bridge Coil ProtectionThe secondary voltage of the bridge coil L5422, is guarded atthe diode modulator (D6421/6422) via a 10 V zener diode(6499 on diagram A3). When the bridge-coil is workingproperly, the average voltage on D6422 is such that thiszener diode will conduct. It will drive TS7652 into saturation.When, for any reason, the secondary side of the bridge coilis shorted, the average voltage on D6422 will drop below thezener-voltage, and TS7652 will block. Now capacitor C2642is charged. Transistor TS7407 starts conducting and theSUP-ENABLE signal is grounded via R3403. This will switch‘off’ the main supply (see diagram A1).

CL 16532044_021.eps140501

HOTCOLD

3407

3631

3640

FRAMEDEFL.COIL

1620 ROTATION COIL

+8V

7440-A7450-A

7450-B

+8V

+8V

+11V

TDA 7052

TILT 25

2

1

3

FD-

FD+

E/W DRIVE

HOP

FRAME

E/W

HFB-X-RAY-PROT 7455

3642

+13VLOT

-15VLOT

3628

V-SHIFT

V-SHIFT

+8V

5621

76413639

3623

36202653

7482 E/W E/W

2

1 5

4


Frame Output ProtectionVia the circuit built around TS7641 the frame output stage isguarded. If the frame output stage is working properly,TS7641 and TS7652 will both conduct and thereby dischargeC2642. TS7407 is blocked, so the SUP-ENABLE signal is‘high’.If there are frame pulses missing, TS7641 will block andcapacitor C2642 is charged. Transistor TS7407 startsconducting and the SUP-ENABLE signal is grounded viaR3403. This will switch ‘off’ the main supply (see diagramA1).

ARC ProtectionIf there are ‘open’ connections (e.g. bad solder joints) in thehigh energy deflection circuitry, this can lead to damagingeffects (read: fire). For that reason, the E/W current is sensed(via 3479//3480). If this current becomes too high, the‘thyristor’ circuit (TS7653 and TS7654) is triggered. TS7442is switched ‘on’ and TS7443 is forced into conduction. . The‘SUP-ENABLE’ signal is shorted now to ground level, whichwill force the Main Power Supply to Standby mode

9.12 Audio (diagram B6, A6 & A7)

9.12.1 Introduction

All EM3E sets contain one of ITT’s Multi-standard SoundProcessing (MSP) ICs for sound decoding. The diversityarises because each member of the MSP-family handles itsown set of sound standards:• MSP3411: Virtual Dolby decoding.• MSP3412: Dolby ProLogic decoding.Both versions also handle NICAM.

The MSP IC takes care of the main FM sound decoding. AMdecoding for the L system is done by the HIP. Thedemodulated L sound is then again source selected andprocessed in the MSP. The reason for this is the bad AMdetection performance of the MSP. However in case ofNICAM L, it is handled by the MSP.

All MSP versions contain digital audio processing, used forthe basic left/right stereo sound, such as bass, treble,balance, incredible sound and spatial.In addition to that, both versions are capable of Dolbyprocessing:• The MSP3411can perform ‘Virtual Dolby’ processing (a

Dolby approved sound mode for surround soundreproduction with left/right speakers only).

Figure 9-13

• The MSP3412 can perform ‘Dolby ProLogic’ processing(left, right and (mono) surround).

Figure 9-14

Following amplifier configurations are possible:• Virtual Dolby, L/R, 2 x 15 W (88XX-series)• 3D Surround, L/R, Centre, Subwoofer, 4 x 15 W (95XX-

series).

9.12.2 Inputs / Outputs

Both versions can cover 4 stereo inputs and one AM (mono)input. This means in practice: 3 SCART inputs, 1 side inputand 1 AM (mono) input.

Both versions have the following outputs: SCART1 (CVBS/decoder out), SCART2 (record select/WYSIWYR out) andheadphone.

9.12.3 Source Selection

The constant level output to SCART2 is connected via a so-called 'Régimbeau' switch (IC7652) (see also Figure 9-13).This switch is needed to prevent acoustic feedback (Larseneffect). This effect is caused, when EXT2 is chosen as inputsignal, and the output of SCART2 is selected. This meansthat the main picture is also EXT2, which will cause theLarsen effect.To prevent this, the record select must be switched to‘Tuner’. This is especially important when decoders are used,behind a 'transparent' VCR connected to EXT2.

To get a constant level output if the Tuner is selected, theSCART1 output (‘Tuner’ at any time), has to be fed back tothe input selector and selected as input for the MSP(SCART1 input).

The MSP34XX has a separate headphone output, so soundcontrol be done separate from the speakers.

9.12.4 Audio Decoding

At the input a choice can be made between two IF-signals;SIF and SIFM.The selected signal is fed to the AGC. After this, an ADCconverts the IF-signal to digital.Two demodulation channels can process this digital signal.The first one is able to handle FM and NICAM signals. Thesecond one can handle FM and AM signals.Each channel contains a mixer to shift the incoming signal inthe frequency domain. This shift is determined by the valueof a DCO.After the down-mix, the signal is fed, via a filter, to adiscriminator. From here the AM, FM or NICAMdemodulation can be performed.

MONO-IN

76517770 HEADPHONE

CINCH

L/RMAIN

SCART 2

SCART 1 / decoder out

Constant Level

ANA_INI+

DACA_L/R

DACM_L/R

SC2-OUT

SC1-OUT

SC1-IN

MICRONASMSP3411SC2-IN

SC3-IN

TUNER L/R

28/29

CL L/R

20/21

17/18

25/26

SC4-IN

EXT1 L/R

EXT2 L/R

FRONT L/R

EXT3 L/R

44/45

50

47

41/42

38/39

35/36

CL 16532044_028.eps140501

MAIN IFHIP

7700

765274HC4053

1/3

2/54/15

SEL_IN_2

16

MONO-IN

7651

CENTER

SCART 2

SCART 1 / decoder out

Constant LevelVariable Level

ANA_IN1+

DACA_L/R

DACM_L/R

D_CTR_I/O_0

SC1-OUT

SC1-IN

MICRONASMSP3412G

SC2-IN

SC3-IN

TUNER L/R

28/29

CL L/R

25/26

7653

17/18

24

DACM_L/R

DACM_SUB

DACM_C

SC2-OUT

23

22

"Set is center"

20/21

SC4-IN

EXT1 L/R

EXT2 L/R

FRONT L/R

EXT3 L/R

44/45

50

47

41/42

38/39

35/36

CL 16532044_029.eps140501

MAIN IFHIP

7702

74HC4053

2 times74HC4053

SEL_IN_27652

Surround cinchor Phone plug

MAIN

7700

SUBWOOFER

7702

HEADPHONE

7770

765274HC4053


Both channels contain an 'automatic carrier mute' function,which automatically mutes the output of the analogue sectionwhen no carrier is detected.After demodulation, the FM-signals are subjected to a de-emphasis operation. After that the matrix of the stereosystem is applied.

9.12.5 Audio Processing

The sound processing in EM3E is completely done by theMSP's:• Volume control is done by the user via the SOUND

menu.• Tone control in 'Stereo' sets is done via the BASS/

TREBLE control, in 'Virtual Dolby' sets via the 5-bandequaliser.

• Headphone control, the MSP has a separate Headphoneoutput so separate sound control is possible.

Automatic Volume Levelling (AVL)One of the features of the MSP-family is Automatic VolumeLimiting (AVL). If used, it limits the big volume differences inthe broadcast between e.g. news transmissions andcommercials, or within a movie.To be able to get a Dolby approval (for the Virtual Dolby sets),the AVL feature must be switchable. Therefore, the AVLfeature is customer switchable via the menu.

9.12.6 Audio Amplifier (diagram A6)

The audio amplifier is an integrated ‘class-D’ power amplifierIC, the TDA7490. It delivers an output of 2 x 15 WRMS to 2full range speakers. For the higher specified sets, asubwoofer and centre speaker are easy to implement, byadding a second amplifier.

PrincipleAudio-power-amplifier systems have traditionally used linearamplifiers, which are well known for being inefficient. In fact,a linear Class AB amplifier is designed to act as a variableresistor network between the power supply and the load. Thetransistors operate in their linear region and the voltage thatis dropped across the transistors (in their role as variableresistors) is lost as heat, particularly in the output transistors.Class D amplifiers were developed as a way to increase theefficiency of audio-power-amplifier systems.

The Class D amplifier works by varying the duty cycle of aPulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal.By comparing the input voltage to a triangle wave, theamplifier increases duty cycle to increase output voltage, anddecreases duty cycle to decrease output voltage.The output transistors of a Class D amplifier switch from full‘off’ to full ‘on’ (saturated) and then back again, spending verylittle time in the linear region in between. Therefore, very littlepower is lost to heat.If the transistors have a low ‘on’ resistance RDS(ON), littlevoltage is dropped across them, further reducing losses.

The advantage of Class D is increased efficiency (= less heatdissipation). Class D amplifiers can drive the same outputpower as a Class AB amplifier using less supply current.The disadvantage is the large output filter that drives up costand size. The main reason for this filter, is that the switchingwaveform results in maximum current flow. This causes moreloss in the load, which causes lower efficiency.An LC filter with a cutoff frequency less than the Class Dswitching frequency (200 kHz), allows the switching currentto flow through the filter instead of the load. The filter is lesslossy than the speaker, which causes less power dissipatedat high output power and increases efficiency in most cases.

The supply voltage is a symmetrical voltage of +/- 16 V (or +/- 19 V depending on the set execution), generated by themain supply via L5512 (or L5506).

MuteSound-mute is done via the STBY-MUTE line connected topin 6 (tri-state input) of the amplifier IC. This line is activatedvia the SOUND-ENABLE line (software controlled) and/orPOR line (hardware controlled).This signal is inverted by TS7701 and/or TS7703, as a resultof which at a high level of the SOUND-ENABLE signal,current is sinked from pin 2 and the IC mutes.

ProtectionA loudspeaker DC protection is implemented. The amplifierIC TDA7490 has a ‘standby-mute-play’ feature via the tri-state input pin 6. When the voltage on pin 6 is:• 0 - 0.7 V, the IC is in ‘standby’ mode• 1.7 - 2.5 V, the IC is in ‘mute’ mode• 4 - 5 V, the IC is in ‘play’ mode (normal operation).Note: this is a ‘local’ protection, not known to themicroprocessor.

This works as follows:• During normal operation, VX is ‘low’ (0 V) and VY is ‘high’

(+5 V).• When a positive DC-voltage is detected on a

loudspeaker output (= VX ), TS7704, TS7706 andTS7707 will conduct, making VY ‘low’.

• When a negative DC-voltage is detected on aloudspeaker output (= VX ), TS7705, TS7706 andTS7707 will conduct, making VY also ‘low’.

When VY is ‘low’ (read 0 V), the tri-state input (pin 6) puts theamplifier IC in ‘standby’ mode.

Figure 9-15

9.12.7 Headphone Amplifier (diagram A7)

The headphone amplifier is a straight forward OpAmpamplifier (7770, NJM4556). It is supplied with +/- 16 V.

9.13 Teletext and NexTView

9.13.1 Teletext

The TXT-decoder in the OTC gets its video signal directly onpin 5 (from the HIP).The RGB-outputs are available on pins 77/78/79. Fastblanking is realised via pen 80.The DRAM (IC7007) of the microprocessor is used forstorage of the TXT pages.

CL 16532044_017.eps140501

OUT

R

L

(RES)

C/SW

(PROT 1)

2778

7704

47K

47K

10K

+5V

47K

33K

7705

2705

7707

470N

VYOUT

6 23

VX

7703

7706

7701

10K

10K

Sound Enable

POR

SOUND-IC's

7700/7702

STANDBY-MUTE(TRISTATE)

100K

10K


9.13.2 NexTView

NexTView allows the user to display a program guide on theTV screen, that contains extensive information for eachprogram (only when supported by the programs provider).

This information can be displayed in a number of differentsummaries:• DAY: The daily summary shows, from the current

moment, the program schedule for several stations for ashort time ahead.

• CHANNEL: The channel summary shows the programschedule for one station.

• THEME: The theme summary shows, for each theme,the program schedule of the various stations. Thesethemes consist of sport, film, culture, etc. and isdetermined from the station side.

NexTView does not have to restrict itself to information aboutthe station that is being viewed, but also offers informationabout other stations. In the various summaries 3 differentcommands can be given for the various program overviews.These commands appear as follows:• WATCH: The set immediately switches over to the

station concerned.• REMINDER: The start time and date and the station of

the program concerned is stored in the TV reminder list.The TV will give an OSD-message with the programinformation, or switch on the set at the correct moment(provided the set is in Standby) and tune to the stationconcerned.

• RECORD: The timer of the video recorder with ‘EasylinkPlus’ is programmed with the data of the programconcerned. There has to be a video recorder (withEasylink Plus) connected to SCART2 otherwise the‘RECORD’ function will not be highlighted. Theconnection is via pin 10 from SCART. This means that ithas to be a full SCART or at least pin 10 has to be wired.

In order to be able to realise NexTView, two teletext type dataflows, Data stream 1 and 2, are transmitted with various sub-code pages of information. This data flow can transportlimited information (max. 40 pages). Data stream 1 is quickrepeating with a repetition time of approximately 20 to 30seconds. However, Data stream 2 has a much longerrepetition time of approximately half an hour and has a largetransport capacity.• Data stream 1 contains information of the station that is

being viewed.• Data stream 2 contains up to one week of advance

information from various stations that are covered by theprovider.

9.14 CRT / SCAVEM / Rotation (diagram F)

9.14.1 RGB Amplifiers

On the CRT panel, the RGB amplifier (TDA6108, IC7307) islocated. Via the outputs 7, 8 and 9 the cathodes of the picturetube are driven.The supply voltage for the amplifier is 200 V and is derivedfrom the LOT.

9.14.2 SCAVEM

The SCAn VElocity Modulation (SCAVEM) circuitry isimplemented in the layout of the picture tube panel. It is thusnot an extra module. This circuit influences the horizontaldeflection as a function of the picture content. In an idealsquare wave, the sides are limited in slope due to a limitedbandwidth (5 MHz).

PrincipleSCAVEM will improve the slope as follows:At a positive slope, a SCAVEM current is generated whichsupports the deflection current. At the first half of the slope,the spot is accelerated and the picture is darker. At thesecond half of the slope, the spot is delayed and the slopebecomes steeper.At the end of the slope, the SCAVEM-current decays to zeroand the spot is at the original position. An overshoot occurswhich improves the impression of sharpness.At the negative slope, the SCAVEM-current counteracts thedeflection. During the first half of the slope, the spot isdelayed, the slope becomes steeper. During the second halfthe spot accelerates, the SCAVEM-current is zero at the endof the slope.

ImplementationVia the three resistors R33358, R33359 and R3360, Red,Green and Blue are added together, buffered and offered tothe emitter of TS7300. On the collector of this transistor,configured in a common base, the sum of these 3 signals isobtained. Via the emitter follower formed with TS7301, thissignal is conveyed to the differentiator C2330, R3324 andR3318. Only the high frequencies are differentiated (smallRC-time).The positive and negative pulses of this signal driverespectively TS7303 and TS7302 into conductivity. The DCsetting of the output stage is set by R3304, R3308, R3316and R3319. The working voltage of the transistors is settledat half the supply voltage.At the positive section of the pulse, the current flows throughR3318, C2307, the SCAVEM-coil and TS7303. At thenegative section of the pulse, the current flows throughR3318, C2309, the SCAVEM-coil and TS7302.

9.14.3 Rotation

In sets with a rotation coil (wide screen sets), the amount offrame rotation is adjusted with the DAC-output of the HOP(see also 'Vertical Deflection').

9.15 Software Related Features

Following features are described:• Auto TV• ‘Switch On’ Behaviour

9.15.1 AutoTV

The AutoTV (or 'Automatic Picture Control' or 'ActiveControl') aims at giving the customer the best possiblepicture performance at any time. Therefor it does real timeprocessing of the video signal and as a result, it decides toadapt several video parameters throughout the wholechassis.

The AutoTV feature integrates traditional pictureperformance, AutoTV functionality and 'smart controls' inorder to come to a kind of 'super smart' TV. It can besubdivided in:• Auto Noise Reduction. This algorithm measures the

amount of noise in the incoming video signal (this is doneby the LIMERIC part of the PICNIC). As a result of thismeasurement, the amount of noise in the picture iscorrected, starting from that noise level which isannoying for the customer. Which parameters exactlycan be used is depending on the hardware.

• Auto Sharpness. This algorithm measures the amountof sharpness via the bandwidth of the incoming videosignal and adapts the peaking frequency in the PICNICaccording to this info. If the 'sharpness meter' sees thevideo content as 'sharp', high frequency peaking will beused. On the other hand, if the picture content is seen as


'not sharp', a low/mid frequency peaking is used. Thereis a coupling between the Auto Noise and the AutoSharpness algorithm: if noise is present in the videocontent, then in general the sharpness will be made lessaggressive. Special care has to be taken to theinteraction of the LIMERIC and the vertical peaking of thePICNIC: a too big amount of vertical peaking increasesthe visibility of the 2DNR artefacts.

9.15.2 ‘Switch On’ Behaviour

Below find the start-up sequence:1. After the power is applied, the 'Standby supply' starts

oscillating, generating the +5V2 (and +3V3). A RESET isgenerated and the OTC is awakened.

2. Next step is the check whether the set needs to be in‘Standby’ mode or not. Therefore, the NVM content isread and the Standby-bit is checked. If the set is to stayin Standby, there is no further action.

3. If the set will switches 'on', first the degaussing will beactivated (12 seconds). Meanwhile the MSP is reset andthe Standby line is pulled low, leading to a full semistandby mode (5 V and 8V switched on)

4. The OTC waits until the +5V and the +8 V are fullypresent. This is done by checking the AD-input of theOTC. The +5V, +8V and I2C protection-algoritms areactivated.

5. The HOP is instructed via the I2C-bus to start the drive.Via the SUP-ENABLE signal, the main supply isactivated. The Line Deflection circuitry is supplied nowwith the VBAT, and the EHT generation can start.

6. During start-up of the deflection, I�C traffic must bedisabled for 250 ms to avoid data corruption. If flashes orspikes are generated during EHT start-up, I�C data couldbe disturbed or corrupted.

7. After deflection is powered up completely, all the otherprotection-algorithms are activated. The black currentstabilisation loop in the HOP is switched on. Some extrachecking is done to ensure that the loops are completelystabilised. The OTC sets all the necessary parametersfor a correct sound and image and unblanks the picture.

9.16 Abbreviation List

AARA Automatic Aspect Ratio Adaptation:algorithm that adapts aspect ratio toremove horizontal black bars;keeping up the original aspect ratio

ACI Automatic Channel Installation:algorithm that installs TV setsdirectly from cable network bymeans of a predefined TXT page

ADC Analogue Digital ConverterAFC Automatic Frequency Control:

control signal used to tune to thecorrect frequency

AGC Automatic Gain Control: algorithmthat controls the video input of thefeature-box

AM Amplitude ModulationANR Automatic Noise Reduction: one of

the algorithms of Auto TVAR Aspect Ratio: 4 by 3 or 16 by 9Artistic see OTC 2.5: main processorASF Auto Screen Fit: algorithm that

adapts aspect ratio to removehorizontal black bars but withoutthrowing away video information

ATV See Auto TVAUDIO_C Audio CentreAUDIO_L Audio LeftAUDIO_R Audio RightAUDIO_SL Audio Surround LeftAUDIO-SR Audio surround rightAUDIO_SW Audio SubwooferAuto TV Name for the combination of picture

features/improvements which workautomatically (ANR / Autosharpness/Auto Histo/ambient light).

BG System B and GB-SC1-IN Blue SCART1 inB-SC2-IN Blue SCART2 inB-TXT Blue teletextCL Constant Level: audio output to

connect with an external amplifierComPair Computer aided rePairCRT Cathode Ray Tube or picture tubeCSM Customer Service ModeCTI Colour Transient Improvement:

manipulates steepness of chromatransients

CVBS Composite Video Blanking andSynchronisation

CVBS-TER CVBS terrestrialDAC Digital to Analogue ConverterDBE Dynamic Bass Enhancement: extra

low frequency amplificationDC-filament Filament supply voltageDFU Direction For Use: description for the

end userDNR Digital Noise Reduction: noise

reduction feature of the boxDSP Digital Signal ProcessingDST Dealer Service Tool: special remote

control designed for dealers to entere.g. service mode

DVD Digital Versatile DiscDYN-FASE-COR Dynamic phase correctionEHT Extra High TensionEHT-INFO Extra High Tension informationEPG Electronic Program Guide: system

used by broadcasters to transmit TVguide information (= NexTView)

EW East West, related to horizontaldeflection of the set


EXT External (source), entering the setvia SCART or via cinches

FBL Fast Blanking: DC signalaccompanying RGB signals

FBX Feature Box: part of small signal /separate module which contains 100Hz processing, extra featuring andAutoTV algorithms

FILAMENT Filament of CRTFLASH Flash memoryFM Field Memory or Frequency

ModulationG-TXT Green teletextHA50 Horizontal Acquisition 1fh:

horizontal sync pulse coming out ofthe HIP

HD100 Horizontal Drive 2fh: horizontal syncpulse coming out of the feature-box

HFB Horizontal Flyback Pulse: horizontalsync pulse from large signaldeflection

HIP High-end video Input Processor:video and chroma decoder of EM3E

HOP High-end video Output Processor:video, sync and geometry controllerof EM3E

HP HeadphoneInterlaced Scan mode where two fields are

used to form one frame. Each fieldcontains half the number of the totalamount of lines. The fields arewritten in ‘pairs’, causing line flicker.

Last Status The settings last chosen by thecustomer and read and stored inRAM or in the NVM. They are calledat start-up of the set to configure itaccording the customers wishes

LDP Line Deflection ProtectionLED Light Emitting DiodeLINE-DRIVE Line drive signalLNA Low Noise AdapterLSP Large signal panelMSP Multi-standard Sound Processor:

ITT sound decoder of EM3EMUTE Mute-LineNC Not ConnectedNVM Non Volatile Memory: IC containing

TV related data e.g. alignmentsO/C Open CircuitON/OFF LED On/Off control signal for the LEDOSD On Screen DisplayOTC On screen display Teletext and

Control; also named Artistic(SAA5800)

P50 Project 50 communication: protocolbetween TV and peripherals

PCB Printed Circuit boardPICNIC Peripheral Integrated Combined

Network IC: main IC for 100 Hzfeaturing and feature processing

Progressive Scan Scan mode where all scan lines aredisplayed in one frame at the sametime, creating a double verticalresolution.

PTP Picture Tube PanelRAM Random Access MemoryR-TXT Red teletextRC Remote ControlRC5 / RC6 Signal protocol from the remote

control receiverRESET Reset signalROM Read Only MemorySAM Service Alignment ModeSC Sandcastle: pulse derived from sync

signals

SCAVEM Scan Velocity ModulationS/C Short CircuitSIF Sound Intermediate FrequencySIMM 80-fold connector between LSP and

SSBSNERT Synchronous No parity Eight bit

Reception and TransmitSSB Small Signal BoardSTBY StandbySW SubwooferTXT TeletextTXT DS Teletext Dual Screen�P MicroprocessorU100 U from Feature BoxV100 V from Feature BoxVA50 Vertical Acquisition 1FhVBAT Main supply for deflection (mostly

141 V)VD100 Vertical Drive 2fh: vertical sync

pulse from deflectionVFB Vertical Flyback Pulse: vertical sync

pulse coming from the feature boxVL Variable Level out: processed audio

output towards external amplifierWYSIWYR What You See Is What You Record:

record selection that follows mainpicture and sound

XTAL Quartz crystalY100 Y from Feature BoxY-OUT Luminance-signal to HOP IC

Spare Parts List GB 111EM3E 10.

10. Spare Parts List

Large Signal Panel [A]

Various

0010 2422 025 16374 2P Male0020 4822 267 10774 2P Male0032 4822 492 70788 IC-SPRING0037 3104 304 21112 LOT SSB SUPPORT0045 4822 267 10734 5P MALE0065 3104 304 22031 LOT SPACER0066 3104 304 21591 SCART SUPPORT

BRACKET0150 4822 265 11253 FUSE HOLDER0153 4822 265 11253 FUSE HOLDER0317 4822 265 20723 2P MALE0324 3104 311 01881 CABLE 7P 480mm0325 2422 025 16382 3P Male0735 2422 025 16407 3P Male0736 2422 025 16382 3P Male0936 2422 025 12485 11P Male0940 4822 267 10968 11P FEMALE0943 4822 267 10748 3P MALE0945 4822 267 10735 3P MALE0946 5322 268 90415 2P MALE0947 4822 267 10734 5P MALE1001 4822 252 60151 SURGE PROTECT1002 2422 132 07411 RELAY 1P 5V 5A1003 4822 267 10973 1P1200 4822 210 10848 UV1316/A I U-21205 2422 025 16599 80P Female SIMM1501 4822 070 34002 FUSE 4A1503 2422 086 10912 FUSE 2,5A1901 4822 267 10771 IC SOCKET 42P1902 4822 267 10982 2P8000 4822 320 12525 CABLE8001 4822 320 20234 EHT CABLE8015 4822 320 20216 CABLE

3122 785 100 Supply Kit Mains SupplyEM2E

3122 785 100 Supply Kit Standby SupplyEM2E

3122 785 100 Line Repair Kit EM2E

�

2101 5322 122 32818 2.2nF 10% 100V2102 4822 124 40248 10�F 20% 63V2103 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2104 4822 123 14025 2200�F 20% 16V2105 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2106 5322 126 10223 4.7nF 10% 63V2107 5322 122 32818 2.2nF 10% 100V2108 4822 121 70162 10nF 5% 400V2109 4822 126 13482 470nF 80/20% 16V2110 5322 121 42498 680nF 5% 63V2111 4822 121 43526 47nF 5% 250V2113 4822 122 33127 2.2nF 10% 63V2114 4822 126 10206 2.2nF 10% 500V2200 4822 124 40196 220�F 20% 16V2201 4822 126 14076 220nF 25V2202 4822 126 13473 220nF 80-20% 50V2203 4822 124 41584 100�F 20% 10V2400 4822 124 11575 47�F 20% 160V2412 4822 126 13751 47nF 10% 63V2413 4822 124 12255 10�F 20% 50V2414 4822 126 13751 47nF 10% 63V2415 4822 122 33575 220pF 5% 63V2417 4822 126 14076 220nF 25V2419 4822 126 14237 470pF 10% 2KV2420 4822 121 70594 1nF 5% 2KV2421 2022 333 00086 470nF 5% 250V2421 4822 121 42634 560nF 5% 250V2425 4822 121 10526 9N1 5% 2KV2425 4822 121 70435 10nF 5% 2KV2426 4822 121 10653 22nF 5% 630V2426 4822 121 10658 24nF 5% 630V2429 4822 121 43343 4.7nF 10% 400V2430 4822 121 41857 10nF 5% 250V2431 4822 121 42077 6.8nF 10% 400V2431 4822 126 13599 3.3nF 10% 500V2433 2022 333 00086 470nF 5% 250V2433 4822 121 42634 560nF 5% 250V2435 4822 121 10526 9N1 5% 2KV2450 5322 121 42578 100nF 5% 250V2455 5322 126 10511 1nF 5% 50V2460 4822 124 40784 3300�F 20% 16V2461 4822 122 31177 470pF 10% 500V2462 4822 124 80061 1000�F 20% 25V

2463 4822 122 31177 470pF 10% 500V2464 4822 124 80061 1000�F 20% 25V2465 4822 122 31177 470pF 10% 500V2468 4822 124 12297 4.7�F 20% 350V2469 4822 122 31177 470pF 10% 500V2480 4822 121 51442 2.2nF 10% 50V2489 4822 124 40433 47�F 20% 25V2490 4822 122 33891 3.3nF 10% 63V2491 4822 124 40768 0.47�F 20% 100V2492 4822 126 14076 220nF 25V2495 4822 126 13838 100nF 20% 50V2499 4822 126 13838 100nF 20% 50V2501 4822 126 11524 1.5nF 10% 1KV2502 5322 122 32818 2.2nF 10% 100V2503 5322 121 42489 33nF 5% 250V2505 4822 126 14504 3.3nF 20% 250V2507 4822 126 13589 470nF 275V2508 4822 126 14153 2.2nF 10%B 1KV2509 4822 126 14153 2.2nF 10%B 1KV2510 4822 124 12415 220�F 20% 400V2512 4822 124 12056 1000�F 20% 35V2513 5322 122 34099 470pF 10% 63V2514 5322 122 31863 63V 330pF 5%2515 4822 124 11575 47�F 20% 160V2518 4822 126 11308 47pF 5% 500V2519 5322 122 32818 2.2nF 10% 100V2520 4822 126 14585 100nF 10% 50V2521 4822 122 33216 270pF 5% 50V2528 4822 126 14585 100nF 10% 50V2530 4822 126 14585 100nF 10% 50V2531 4822 122 31169 1.5nF 10% 500V2535 4822 121 43913 470nF 10% 100V2536 4822 126 10206 2.2nF 10% 500V2537 4822 124 11913 22nF 20% 275V2538 5322 126 10223 4.7nF 10% 63V2600 4822 121 43913 470nF 10% 100V2601 4822 121 51252 470nF 5% 63V2602 4822 124 40433 47�F 20% 25V2603 4822 122 33177 10nF 20% 50V2604 4822 124 40248 10�F 20% 63V2610 4822 122 33127 2.2nF 10% 63V2620 4822 126 14076 220nF 25V2621 4822 126 13838 100nF 20% 50V2622 4822 124 40255 100�F 20% 63V2624 4822 121 51252 470nF 5% 63V2625 4822 121 51252 470nF 5% 63V2627 5322 124 40641 10�F 20% 100V2642 4822 124 40255 100�F 20% 63V2700 4822 124 21913 1�F 20% 63V2701 4822 124 21913 1�F 20% 63V2730 4822 124 81151 22�F 50V2731 4822 124 81151 22�F 50V2732 4822 124 40255 100�F 20% 63V2733 4822 124 40255 100�F 20% 63V2734 4822 124 81151 22�F 50V2735 4822 124 81151 22�F 50V2736 5322 122 31865 1.5nF 10% 63V2737 5322 122 31865 1.5nF 10% 63V2756 4822 126 13751 47nF 10% 63V2760 4822 124 80061 1000�F 20% 25V2761 4822 124 80061 1000�F 20% 25V2765 4822 124 40255 100�F 20% 63V2767 4822 124 40255 100�F 20% 63V2782 4822 126 13751 47nF 10% 63V2902 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2903 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2906 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2909 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2910 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2912 4822 124 40248 10�F 20% 63V2913 4822 126 14585 100nF 10% 50V2915 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2916 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2917 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2919 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2920 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2923 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2925 5322 122 31863 330pF 5% 63V2926 4822 124 81044 470�F 20% 6.3V2927 4822 124 40433 47�F 20% 25V2941 5322 122 31865 1.5nF 10% 63V2942 5322 122 31865 1.5nF 10% 63V2951 4822 124 21913 1�F 20% 63V2952 4822 126 13751 47nF 10% 63V2953 4822 126 13751 47nF 10% 63V

�

3101 4822 053 20106 10M 5% 0.25W

3102 4822 050 26801 680� 1% 0.6W3103 4822 050 26801 680� 1% 0.6W3104 4822 116 52195 47� 5% 0.5W3105 4822 050 26801 680� 1% 0.6W3106 4822 116 52256 2k2 5% 0.5W3107 4822 116 52256 2k2 5% 0.5W3108 4822 116 52182 15� 5% 0.5W3110 4822 052 10109 10� 5% 0.33W3113 4822 116 52182 15� 5% 0.5W3114 4822 116 83872 220� 5% 0.5W3117 4822 116 52195 47� 5% 0.5W3118 4822 050 24708 4�7 1% 0.6W3120 4822 051 20109 10� 5% 0.1W3123 4822 116 52176 10� 5% 0.5W3124 4822 116 52199 68� 5% 0.5W3125 4822 116 52182 15� 5% 0.5W3126 4822 050 21003 10k 1% 0.6W3127 4822 116 52289 5k6 5% 0.5W3200 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3201 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3250 4822 051 20223 22k 5% 0.1W3402 4822 117 10837 100k 1% 0.1W3403 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3404 4822 051 20471 470� 5% 0.1W3406 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3407 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3410 4822 051 20479 47� 5% 0.1W3411 4822 116 52193 39� 5% 0.5W3414 4822 117 13577 330� 1% 1.25W3415 3198 012 31590 15� 5% 3W3415 4822 117 12836 12� 5% 3W3417 4822 116 52176 10� 5% 0.5W3418 4822 050 22704 270k 1% 0.6W3431 4822 052 10101 100� 5% 0.33W3431 4822 052 10221 220� 5% 0.33W3450 4822 116 52303 8k2 5% 0.5W3450 4822 116 83961 6k8 5%3451 4822 116 52257 22k 5% 0.5W3460 4822 052 10108 1� 5% 0.33W3461 4822 052 10108 1� 5% 0.33W3462 4822 052 10108 1� 5% 0.33W3463 4822 052 10108 1� 5% 0.33W3464 4822 052 10108 1� 5% 0.33W3465 4822 052 10108 1� 5% 0.33W3466 4822 052 10688 6�8 5% 0.33W3466 4822 052 10828 8�2 5% 0.33W3467 4822 052 10108 1� 5% 0.33W3468 4822 052 11688 6�8 5% 0.5W3475 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W3481 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W3483 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3484 4822 117 11139 1k5 1% 0.1W3485 4822 117 11454 820� 1% 0.1W3486 4822 117 12955 2k7 1% 0.1W3487 4822 117 11449 2k2 1% 0.1W3488 4822 116 52272 330k 5% 0.5W3488 4822 116 83874 220k 5% 0.5W3489 4822 117 11449 2k2 1% 0.1W3491 4822 050 21504 150k 1% 0.6W3495 4822 051 20683 68k 5% 0.1W3496 4822 117 11507 6k8 1% 0.1W3497 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3498 4822 051 20472 4k7 5% 0.1W3499 4822 117 10837 100k 1% 0.1W3500 4822 117 12074 1�5 10% 7W3501 3198 013 04710 470� 2% 1/2W3504 4822 116 83883 470� 5% 0.5W3507 4822 050 21604 160k 1% 0.6W3508 3198 012 16820 6.8k 1W3509 2322 595 90021 VDR DC 1M A/495V3510 4822 117 11951 2k 1% 0.1W3511 4822 116 52276 3k9 5% 0.5W3512 4822 116 52297 68k 5% 0.5W3513 4822 116 52272 330k 5% 0.5W3514 4822 053 10108 1� 5% 1W3515 4822 053 10108 1� 5% 1W3516 4822 116 10075 9� 220V3518 4822 050 11204 120k 1% 0.4W3519 4822 051 20223 22k 5% 0.1W3520 4822 053 11333 33k 5% 2W3521 4822 117 10118 1M 5% 0.5W3522 4822 116 83961 6k8 5%3523 4822 051 20105 1M 5% 0.1W3524 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3525 4822 051 20479 47� 5% 0.1W3526 4822 116 83303 1� 2W3527 4822 117 11454 820� 1% 0.1W3528 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3529 4822 051 20472 4k7 5% 0.1W

Spare Parts ListGB 112 EM3E10.

3530 4822 116 52297 68k 5% 0.5W3531 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3533 4822 051 20159 15� 5% 0.1W3535 4822 051 20273 27k 5% 0.1W3536 4822 117 10837 100k 1% 0.1W3537 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3538 4822 051 20332 3k3 5% 0.1W3539 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3540 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3541 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3542 3198 012 11570 0�15 5% 1W3543 4822 051 20478 4�7 5% 0.1W3544 4822 051 20479 47� 5% 0.1W3600 4822 050 22205 2M2 1% 0.6W3601 4822 050 22205 2M2 1% 0.6W3602 4822 051 20332 3k3 5% 0.1W3603 4822 101 11319 100� LIN3605 4822 051 20273 27k 5% 0.1W3606 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3607 4822 051 20223 22k 5% 0.1W3608 4822 051 20223 22k 5% 0.1W3609 4822 101 11193 47k 30% LIN 0.1W3610 4822 051 20683 68k 5% 0.1W3611 4822 051 20822 8k2 5% 0.1W3612 4822 051 20274 270k 5% 0.1W3613 4822 051 20274 270k 5% 0.1W3614 4822 050 21005 1M 1% 0.6W3615 4822 050 18204 820k 1% 0.4W3615 4822 116 52292 560k 5% 0.5W3616 4822 116 52285 470k 5% 0.5W3617 4822 050 11002 1k 1% 0.4W3618 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3619 4822 051 20562 5k6 5% 0.1W3620 4822 116 80176 1� 5% 0.5W3620 4822 116 80676 1�5 5% 0.5W3621 4822 116 80176 1� 5% 0.5W3622 4822 116 80176 1� 5% 0.5W3623 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3624 4822 052 10158 1�5 5% 0.33W3625 4822 116 83872 220� 5% 0.5W3626 4822 116 83872 220� 5% 0.5W3627 4822 050 21003 10k 1% 0.6W3630 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3631 4822 051 20332 3k3 5% 0.1W3632 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3633 4822 050 21003 10k 1% 0.6W3644 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3645 4822 116 52245 150k 5% 0.5W3652 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3701 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3702 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3730 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3731 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3732 4822 051 20822 8k2 5% 0.1W3733 4822 051 20822 8k2 5% 0.1W3734 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3735 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3736 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3737 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3738 4822 117 11148 56k 1% 0.1W3739 4822 117 11148 56k 1% 0.1W3740 4822 051 20683 68k 5% 0.1W3741 4822 051 20683 68k 5% 0.1W3742 4822 116 52199 68� 5% 0.5W3743 4822 116 52199 68� 5% 0.5W3756 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3762 4822 051 20828 8�2 5% 0.1W3765 4822 117 11507 6k8 1% 0.1W3770 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3771 4822 116 83933 15k 1% 0.1W3773 4822 116 83933 15k 1% 0.1W3789 4822 051 20828 8�2 5% 0.1W3790 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3792 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3900 4822 116 83868 150� 5% 0.5W3901 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3902 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3903 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3905 4822 116 83883 470� 5% 0.5W3906 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3907 4822 051 20561 560� 5% 0.1W3908 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3909 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3910 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3911 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3913 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3915 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3916 4822 051 20822 8k2 5% 0.1W3918 4822 051 20392 3k9 5% 0.1W3919 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3920 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3921 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3922 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3923 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W

3924 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3925 4822 052 10688 6�8 5% 0.33W3928 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3929 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3930 4822 051 20561 560� 5% 0.1W3932 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3935 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3936 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3937 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3940 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3941 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3942 4822 051 20822 8k2 5% 0.1W3944 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3945 4822 051 20392 3k9 5% 0.1W3946 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3970 4822 051 20471 470� 5% 0.1W3971 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3972 4822 117 10833 10k 1% 0.1W3991 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W3992 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3993 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3994 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W3995 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W3996 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W3997 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W3998 4822 116 52175 100� 5% 0.5W4xxx 4822 051 10008 0� 5% 0.25W4xxx 4822 051 20008 0� 5% 0.25W9220 4822 051 20008 JUMPER9225 4822 051 20008 JUMPER9723 4822 051 20008 JUMPER9724 4822 051 20008 JUMPER

�

5101 4822 146 11065 STANDBY TFM5102 4822 157 70436 8.2�H5103 4822 526 10704 BEAD 50MHz5104 4822 157 11411 BEAD 100MHz5105 4822 526 10704 BEAD 100MHz5200 4822 157 11775 6.8�H 5%5400 4822 157 11869 33�H 10%5410 4822 146 11065 TFM SIG FIX5411 4822 157 71097 0.56�H5421 4822 157 11204 COIL LINE CORR.(29")5421 4822 157 11839 COIL LINE CORR. (28")5421 4822 157 11841 COIL LINE CORR.

(28"WS,32"WS)5422 4822 157 71535 COIL BRIDGE5424 4822 157 63255 COIL BRIDGE5430 8204 000 73321 LOT (29")5430 8228 001 33243 LOT (25",28")5461 4822 157 11411 BEAD 100MHz5463 4822 157 11411 BEAD 100MHz5465 4822 157 11411 BEAD 100MHz5466 4822 157 71467 39U 10%5467 4822 157 11411 BEAD 100MHz5504 2422 549 43286 MAINS 35mH 1A55505 4822 157 11411 BEAD 100MHz5506 2422 531 98042 TFM W8085-002 Y5510 4822 157 11411 BEAD 100MHz5620 4822 157 11771 0.09�H 10%

�

6103 4822 130 42488 BYD33D6105 4822 130 34281 BZX79-B156106 4822 130 34499 BZX79-B206108 4822 130 30621 1N41486109 4822 130 31083 BYW556111 4822 130 32715 SB3406120 4822 130 30621 1N41486121 4822 130 30621 1N41486122 3198 010 53980 BZX79-B3V96200 9322 149 10685 BZM55-C336201 4822 130 83757 BAS2166202 4822 130 83757 BAS2166203 4822 130 10852 BZX284-C6V86204 4822 130 10852 BZX284-C6V86205 4822 130 83757 BAS2166405 4822 130 11027 BZX284-C336406 4822 130 83757 BAS2166407 4822 130 83757 BAS2166408 4822 130 42488 BYD33D6421 4822 130 10753 BY359X-15006422 4822 130 10218 BY229X-8006442 9322 129 42685 BZM55-C156461 4822 130 82512 BYV29F-4006462 4822 130 41487 BYV95C6464 5322 130 31938 BYV27-2006468 4822 130 42488 BYD33D6480 4822 130 42488 BYD33D

6481 4822 130 31024 BZX79-B186482 4822 130 83757 BAS2166499 4822 130 83757 BAS2166501 4822 130 31083 BYW556502 4822 130 31083 BYW556503 4822 130 31083 BYW556504 4822 130 31083 BYW556505 4822 130 34281 BZX79-B156506 4822 130 30621 1N41486507 4822 130 80791 BYV28-200/206508 4822 130 11415 BYV28-400/206510 4822 130 34281 BZX79-B156511 4822 130 83757 BAS2166512 4822 130 83757 BAS2166514 5322 130 31932 BZT03-C2006515 4822 130 32904 BZV85-C5V66516 4822 130 83757 BAS2166517 4822 130 31983 BAT856518 4822 130 83757 BAS2166520 4822 130 42488 BYD33D6521 4822 130 83757 BAS2166522 4822 130 83757 BAS2166600 4822 130 31983 BAT856616 4822 130 83757 BAS2166619 4822 130 42488 BYD33D6620 5322 130 31938 BYV27-2006621 4822 130 42488 BYD33D6622 5322 130 33635 BZV85-C8V26623 4822 130 83757 BAS216

��

7100 4822 130 44568 BC557B7101 4822 130 40959 BC547B7102 4822 130 11417 STP3NB60FP7104 4822 130 11418 TCDT1102G7407 4822 130 60511 BC847B7408 9332 592 40126 BC3687409 4822 130 60511 BC847B7421 4822 130 63666 BU2520DF7480 4822 130 11417 STP3NB60FP7481 4822 130 44568 BC557B7482 4822 130 11418 TCDT1102G7499 4822 130 60373 BC856B7502 4822 130 61675 BF4877504 9322 126 65687 STP5NB60FP7505 4822 130 60373 BC856B7506 4822 209 81397 TL431CLPST7510 4822 130 60511 BC847B7511 4822 130 60373 BC856B7528 4822 130 40981 BC337-257529 4822 130 60511 BC847B7600 4822 130 44461 BC546B7602 4822 130 60511 BC847B7603 4822 130 60373 BC856B7605 4822 130 60511 BC847B7606 4822 130 60511 BC847B7610 4822 130 11418 TCDT1102G7620 4822 209 90009 TDA81777641 4822 130 60511 BC847B7652 4822 130 60511 BC847B7720 4822 130 60511 BC847B7721 4822 130 60511 BC847B7722 4822 130 60373 BC856B7723 4822 130 60373 BC856B7724 4822 130 60511 BC847B7725 4822 130 60511 BC847B7730 4822 130 60511 BC847B7750 4822 209 32269 TDA2616/N17900 4822 130 40959 BC547B7901 4822 130 40959 BC547B7905 9332 592 40126 BC3687906 4822 209 12334 L4940V857907 4822 130 60511 BC847B

Small Signal Panel [B]

Various

1001 2422 543 89022 RES XTL 6M0001301 2422 540 98456 RES 12MHz1305 2422 543 01092 RES XTL 4M4336191308 2422 543 01097 RES XTL 3M5795451405 2422 549 44369 FIL SAW 38MHz1407 2422 549 44324 FIL TPWCC04BS1408 2422 549 44372 FIL SAW 38MHz1409 2422 025 16542 2P MALE1651 2422 543 89019 RES XTL 8M4321701 2422 543 89018 RES XTL 12MHz


�

2001 4822 126 11671 33pF2002 4822 126 11669 27pF2003 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V2004 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V2005 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2006 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2007 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2008 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2009 4822 122 33777 47pF 5% 63V2010 4822 122 33777 47pF 5% 63V2011 4822 122 33777 47pF 5% 63V2012 4822 122 33777 47pF 5% 63V2013 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2014 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2015 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2016 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2017 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2019 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2020 4822 126 13883 220pF 5% 50V2022 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2023 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2024 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2025 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2026 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2027 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2028 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2029 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2031 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2032 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2033 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V2034 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V2035 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V2036 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V2037 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V2038 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2300 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2303 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V2304 4822 122 33741 10pF 10% 50V2306 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2307 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2308 4822 122 33741 10pF 10% 50V2313 4822 121 70159 0.1�F 16V2314 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2315 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2317 4822 126 14491 2.2�F 10V2318 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V2319 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V2320 4822 122 33741 10pF 10% 50V2321 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2322 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2323 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2324 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V2325 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2328 4822 122 33761 22pF 5% 50V2329 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2330 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2331 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2332 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2333 4822 126 14491 2.2�F 10V2334 4822 126 14491 2.2�F 10V2335 4822 124 80349 47�F 20% 6.3V2336 4822 126 14491 2.2�F 10V2338 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V2340 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2341 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2350 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2351 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2352 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2356 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2357 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2358 5322 126 11579 3.3nF 10% 63V2359 4822 122 33752 15pF 5% 50V2361 3198 016 31580 1P5 50V2362 4822 126 11663 12pF2365 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2366 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2367 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2368 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2369 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2370 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2371 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V2372 4822 126 14043 1�F 20% 16V2373 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2374 4822 126 14491 2.2�F 10V2375 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V2376 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2377 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2378 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2384 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2406 4822 126 13883 220pF 5% 50V

2407 4822 126 13956 68pF 5% 63V2408 3198 016 32780 2P7 50V2409 4822 126 14491 2.2�F 10V2410 4822 126 14472 1�F 10% 10V2411 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2412 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V2413 4822 124 80151 47�F 16V2417 3198 017 44740 470nF 10V2418 4822 126 13956 68pF 5% 63V2420 4822 122 33753 150pF 5% 50V2501 4822 122 33777 47pF 5% 63V2502 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2503 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2504 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2505 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2508 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2546 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2547 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2548 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2549 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2550 4822 126 14241 330P 50V2551 5322 126 11579 3.3nF 10% 63V2609 3198 016 31020 0603 25V 1nF2610 4822 126 14238 2N2 50V2611 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V2629 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2636 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2637 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2638 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2640 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V2641 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2642 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2651 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2652 4822 122 33777 47pF 5% 63V2653 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2654 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2655 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2656 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2657 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2658 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2661 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2662 4822 122 32927 220nF 20% 50V2663 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2664 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V2665 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2666 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2667 3198 016 33380 3P3 50V2668 3198 016 33380 3P3 50V2669 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2670 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V2673 3198 016 31020 1nF 25V2674 3198 016 31020 1nF 25V2675 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2677 3198 030 82280 2U2 20% 50V2677 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2678 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2679 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2680 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2681 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2682 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2685 3198 016 31020 1nF 25V2686 3198 016 31020 1nF 25V2690 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2691 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2692 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2693 4822 126 13883 220pF 5% 50V2702 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2703 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2704 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2706 4822 124 12095 100�F 20% 16V2707 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2708 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2709 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2710 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2712 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2713 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2717 4822 126 14218 3.9pF 50V2718 4822 126 11669 27pF2719 4822 126 11663 12pF2720 4822 126 14218 3.9pF 50V2721 4822 126 11669 27pF2723 4822 126 11663 12pF2724 4822 126 14218 3.9pF 50V2725 4822 126 11669 27pF2726 4822 126 11663 12pF2728 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2729 4822 126 14225 56pF 5% 50V2730 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V2731 4822 122 31765 100pF 2% 63V2733 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V2738 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V2743 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V2747 4822 126 14507 18pF 5% 50V2748 4822 126 14507 18pF 5% 50V

2755 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2756 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2757 4822 124 23002 10�F 16V2758 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2759 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2760 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2761 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2762 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2763 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2764 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2765 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2766 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2767 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2770 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2771 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2772 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2773 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2774 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2776 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2785 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2786 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2788 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2790 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2792 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2795 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2796 4822 126 14305 100nF 10% 16V2797 4822 126 13956 68pF 5% 63V2798 3198 016 36810 680P 25V2902 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V

�

3001 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3002 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3003 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W3006 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3007 4822 117 13521 470� 5% 0.63W3008 4822 117 13526 150� 5% 0.63W3009 4822 051 30689 68� 5% 0.063W3011 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3012 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3013 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3014 4822 051 30682 6k8 5% 0.062W3015 4822 051 30474 470k 5% 0.062W3016 4822 051 30152 1k5 5% 0.062W3017 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3018 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3019 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3020 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3021 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3023 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3024 4822 051 30273 27k 5% 0.062W3025 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3026 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3027 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3028 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3029 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3030 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3031 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3032 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3033 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3034 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3035 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3039 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3040 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3041 4822 051 30562 5k6 5% 0.063W3044 2120 108 92846 4k7 5%3058 4822 051 30682 6k8 5% 0.062W3059 2322 704 66201 620� 1%3060 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3061 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3062 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3064 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3073 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3074 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3075 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3076 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3077 4822 051 30272 2k7 5% 0.062W3078 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3079 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3080 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3081 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3083 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3084 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3085 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3086 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3087 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3088 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3090 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3091 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3092 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3300 2322 750 63908 3�9 5%3304 2322 750 63908 3�9 5%

Spare Parts ListGB 114 EM3E10.

3306 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3307 4822 051 30183 18k 5% 0.062W3308 4822 051 30684 680k 5% 0.062W3310 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3311 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W3314 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3315 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3316 4822 051 30123 12k 5% 0.062W3317 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3318 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3320 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3321 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3322 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3324 4822 051 30222 2k2 5% 0.062W3327 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W3328 4822 051 30393 39k 5% 0.062W3329 4822 117 13568 6�8 5%3330 4822 051 30332 3k3 5% 0.062W3331 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3333 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3334 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3335 4822 051 30332 3k3 5% 0.062W3336 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3337 4822 117 12903 1k8 1% 0.063W3338 4822 051 30682 6k8 5% 0.062W3340 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3341 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3342 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3343 4822 051 30683 68k 5% 0.062W3344 4822 051 30222 2k2 5% 0.062W3345 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3346 4822 051 30333 33k 5% 0.062W3347 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W3348 4822 051 30222 2k2 5% 0.062W3362 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3363 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3364 4822 051 30683 68k 5% 0.062W3365 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3366 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3367 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3370 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3371 4822 051 30479 47� 5% 0.062W3372 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3376 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3377 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3378 4822 051 30153 15k 5% 0.062W3382 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3384 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3385 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3386 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W3388 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3389 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3390 4822 051 30153 15k 5% 0.062W3391 4822 051 30683 68k 5% 0.062W3393 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W3394 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3400 4822 117 11152 4�7 5%3406 4822 051 30479 47� 5% 0.062W3411 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3414 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3415 4822 117 12902 8k2 1% 0.063W3416 4822 117 13568 6�8 5%3418 4822 051 30391 390� 5% 0.062W3419 4822 051 30759 75� 5% 0.062W3435 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3436 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3437 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3439 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3441 4822 051 30393 39k 5% 0.062W3445 4822 051 30471 470� 5% 0.062W3446 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3532 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3533 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3540 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W3550 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3551 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3552 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3610 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3611 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3612 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3613 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3614 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3615 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W3616 4822 051 30682 6k8 5% 0.062W3617 4822 051 30682 6k8 5% 0.062W3621 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W3636 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W3637 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W3638 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W3642 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W3644 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W3653 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3654 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3655 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W

3656 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3657 4822 051 30334 330k 5% 0.062W3658 4822 051 30334 330k 5% 0.062W3659 4822 051 30334 330k 5% 0.062W3660 4822 051 30334 330k 5% 0.062W3661 4822 117 11817 1k2 1% 1/16W3662 4822 117 11817 1k2 1% 1/16W3663 4822 117 11817 1k2 1% 1/16W3665 4822 051 30272 2k7 5% 0.062W3673 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3676 4822 117 11817 1k2 1% 1/16W3677 4822 051 30334 330k 5% 0.062W3678 4822 117 11817 1k2 1% 1/16W3679 4822 051 30334 330k 5% 0.062W3680 4822 117 11817 1k2 1% 1/16W3683 4822 051 30272 2k7 5% 0.062W3684 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3685 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3688 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3689 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3702 4822 117 12139 22� 5% 0.062W3703 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3705 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3706 4822 051 30109 10� 5% 0.062W3707 4822 051 30392 3k9 5% 0.063W3708 4822 051 30272 2k7 5% 0.062W3709 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3710 4822 051 30391 390� 5% 0.062W3711 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3712 4822 051 30391 390� 5% 0.062W3713 4822 051 30391 390� 5% 0.062W3714 4822 117 12139 22� 5% 0.062W3716 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3717 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3718 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3719 4822 117 13574 1�5 5% 12063720 4822 117 13574 1�5 5% 12063721 4822 117 13572 22� 5% 12063722 4822 117 13572 22� 5% 12063725 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W3728 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3731 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3732 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3733 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3739 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3740 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3741 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3744 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3745 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W3746 4822 051 30472 4k7 5% 0.062W3747 4822 051 30689 68� 5%3748 4822 051 30689 68� 5%3749 4822 051 30689 68� 5% 0.063W3754 4822 051 30109 10� 5% 0.062W3755 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3757 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3759 3198 021 90030 JUMPER3790 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3791 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3792 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3793 4822 117 12662 10� 5%3793 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3794 4822 117 12662 10� 5%3794 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3795 4822 117 12662 10� 5%3795 4822 117 13522 100� 5% 0.63W3796 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3796 4822 051 30109 10� 5% 0.062W3797 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3900 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3901 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3903 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3905 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3906 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W3907 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3909 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3910 4822 051 30221 220� 5% 0.062W3911 4822 051 30101 100� 5% 0.062W

�

5301 4822 157 11876 6.8�H 10%5302 4822 157 11876 6.8�H 10%5403 2422 549 44461 IND VAR 40mH5404 2422 535 95427 100mH5405 2422 535 95427 IND FXD 100mHz 120R5406 3198 018 33980 3U9 10%5407 3198 018 56880 6U8 10%5408 2422 549 44459 IND VAR 78mH5409 3198 018 51080 1U 10%5410 3198 018 33370 0U33 10%5651 2422 549 43769 100mH5652 2422 549 43769 100mH

5653 2422 549 43769 100mH5654 4822 157 11716 BLM21P300SPT5701 4822 157 71206 BLM21A601SPT5702 2422 535 95427 100mH5703 4822 157 11716 BLM21P300SPT5704 4822 157 11716 BLM21P300SPT5705 2422 535 95427 100mH5706 4822 157 11778 5U6 10%5707 4822 157 11781 BLM11A601SPT15708 4822 157 11778 5U6 10%5709 4822 157 11778 5U6 10%5710 4822 157 11778 5U6 10%5711 4822 157 11781 BLM11A601SPT15713 4822 157 11781 BLM11A601SPT15718 3198 018 33370 0U33 10%5720 4822 157 11781 BLM11A601SPT15910 4822 157 11781 BLM11A601SPT1

�

6001 4822 130 11528 1PS76SB106003 4822 130 11528 1PS76SB106303 4822 130 11594 BZX284-C476304 4822 130 83757 BAS2166306 9322 129 37685 BZM55-C5V66307 4822 130 11528 1PS76SB106309 4822 130 83757 BAS2166310 9322 129 38685 BZM55-C6V86311 9322 149 08685 BZM55-C226319 4822 130 83757 BAS2166334 4822 130 83757 BAS2166403 4822 130 10414 BA7926652 9322 129 40685 BZM55-C106653 4822 130 83757 BAS216

��

7001 9352 629 88557 SAA5801/011 V307002 5322 130 42756 BC857C7003 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7004 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7005 9322 116 74668 LD1117D337006 3104 317 42211 SOFTW.ASSY

3104317022117007 9322 136 53668 MSM51V18165D-60JS7008 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7009 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7010 5322 130 42756 BC857C7011 4822 209 17377 M24C32-WMN6/PROG7301 9352 625 23518 TDA9330H/N27303 5322 130 42756 BC857C7308 9340 310 30215 PDTC144ET7309 9340 310 30215 PDTC144ET7310 9340 310 30215 PDTC144ET7311 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7312 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7320 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7322 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7323 9352 625 24518 TDA9321H/N27324 5322 130 63679 BC847CW7403 4822 130 60511 BC847B7407 4822 130 60373 BC856B7411 4822 130 60511 BC847B7651 9322 143 53671 MSP3415D-FH-B37651 9322 149 63671 MSP3451G-FH-A17652 9351 874 90118 74HC4052PW7656 9340 425 20115 BC847BS7658 9340 425 20115 BC847BS7663 9340 425 20115 BC847BS7674 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7675 9351 874 90118 74HC4052PW7680 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7681 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7701 5322 130 42756 BC857C7702 3198 010 42310 BC847BW7704 4822 209 73852 PMBT23697708 4822 209 90034 SAA4990H/V07709 9352 640 20557 SAA4978H/V2037713 9322 116 74668 LD1117D337714 4822 209 17307 MSM54V12222A-30JS7715 4822 209 17307 MSM54V12222A-30JS7716 2422 486 80737 IC SOCKET 32P

Main Switch Panel [E]

Various

0151 4822 256 91766 LED HOLDER0201 2422 025 16268 2P MALE0202 2422 025 16374 2P MALE0923 2412 020 00724 2P MALE


0947 4822 267 10734 5P MALE1910 4822 130 91478 IR RECEIVER1951 4822 276 14024 2P 4/128A

�

2930 4822 124 41584 100�F 20% 10V

�

3957 4822 053 21335 3M3 5% 0.5W3966 4822 053 21335 3M3 5% 0.5W3978 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3982 4822 117 13577 330� 1% 1.25W

�

6901 4822 130 10859 TLDR5400

CRT Panel [F]

Various

0298 2422 500 80052 9P FEMALE0340 3104 311 02321 CABLE 11P 400mm0383 2422 025 16382 3P MALE

�

2300 4822 124 40764 22�F 100 V2301 4822 124 40196 220�F 20% 16V2302 5322 122 32286 3.3pF 5% 50V2303 5322 122 32268 470pF 10% 50V2304 4822 121 41856 22nF 5% 250V2305 4822 124 41751 47�F 20% 50V2306 4822 126 14585 100nF 10% 50V2307 5322 122 32654 22nF 10% 63V2308 4822 126 13486 15pF 2% 63V2309 5322 122 32654 22nF 10% 63V2310 4822 126 13689 18pF 1% 63V2312 5322 122 32658 22pF 5% 50V2313 4822 124 11565 10�F 20% 250V2316 4822 121 40518 100nF 10% 250V2317 5322 121 44356 4.7nF 5% 2KV2318 5322 122 32654 22nF 10% 63V2320 4822 126 13838 100nF 20% 50V2321 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2322 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2323 5322 122 32531 100pF 5% 50V2325 4822 126 14585 100nF 10% 50V

�

3300 4822 052 10109 10� 5% 0.33W3301 4822 053 12103 10k 5% 3W3302 4822 051 20182 1k8 5% 0.1W3303 4822 117 10965 18k 1% 0.1W3304 4822 117 11454 820� 1% 0.1W3305 4822 117 13577 330� 1% 1.25W3306 4822 051 20478 4�7 5% 0.1W3307 4822 051 20109 10� 5% 0.1W3308 4822 117 11148 56k 1% 0.1W3309 4822 117 10353 150� 1% 0.1W3310 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3311 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3312 4822 117 11449 2k2 1% 0.1W3313 4822 116 83872 220� 5% 0.5W3314 4822 116 83872 220� 5% 0.5W3315 4822 117 11139 1k5 1% 0.1W3316 4822 117 11148 56k 1% 0.1W3317 4822 051 20122 1k2 5% 0.1W3318 4822 051 20159 15� 5% 0.1W3319 4822 117 11454 820� 1% 0.1W3320 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3334 4822 050 11002 1k 1% 0.4W3335 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3336 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3337 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3338 3198 013 01020 1k 2% 1/2W3339 3198 013 01020 1k 2% 1/2W3340 3198 013 01020 1k 2% 1/2W3341 4822 052 10151 150� 5% 0.33W3342 4822 051 20471 470� 5% 0.1W3344 4822 116 52191 33� 5% 0.5W3345 4822 116 52191 33� 5% 0.5W3347 3198 013 01520 1k5 2% 1/2W3348 4822 050 11204 120k 1% 0.4W3349 3198 013 01020 1k 2% 1/2W3350 4822 116 83883 470� 5% 0.5W

3351 4822 116 83883 470� 5% 0.5W3352 4822 116 83883 470� 5% 0.5W3354 4822 117 11449 2k2 1% 0.1W3355 4822 051 20478 4�7 5% 0.1W3356 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W3357 4822 051 20478 4�7 5% 0.1W4xxx 4822 051 10008 0� 5% 0.25W4xxx 4822 051 20008 0� 5% 0.25W

�

5300 2422 531 98035 TFM S13974-01 Y

�

6305 4822 130 30842 BAV216306 4822 130 30842 BAV216307 4822 130 30842 BAV216310 4822 130 83757 BAS216

��

7300 4822 130 44154 BF1997301 4822 130 42589 BF3707302 5322 130 41888 BD140-167303 5322 130 41886 BD139-167307 9352 561 40112 TDA61088317 3104 311 01901 CABLE 2P 560mm8325 3104 311 01911 CABLE 3P 680mm

Side I/O Panel [O]

Various

0900 2422 026 04926 4P FEMALE0901 4822 267 10975 3P0902 4822 267 31014 HEADPHONE SOCKET0936 2422 025 12485 11P MALE

�

2905 4822 122 33177 10nF 20% 50V2906 4822 122 33177 10nF 20% 50V

�

3901 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3902 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3903 4822 051 20101 100� 5% 0.1W3904 4822 116 52201 75� 5% 0.5W3905 4822 050 11002 1k 1% 0.4W3906 4822 050 11002 1k 1% 0.4W3907 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3908 4822 050 11002 1k 1% 0.4W3909 4822 117 10834 47k 1% 0.1W3910 4822 116 52276 3k9 5% 0.5W3911 4822 050 21003 10k 1% 0.6W3912 4822 050 21003 10k 1% 0.6W

Top Control Panel [P]

Various

0345 4822 267 10748 3P MALE1701 4822 276 13775 SWITCH1702 4822 276 13775 SWITCH1703 4822 276 13775 SWITCH1704 4822 276 13775 SWITCH1705 4822 276 13775 SWITCH

�

3701 4822 051 20391 390� 5% 0.1W3702 4822 117 13528 200� 1% 0.125W3703 4822 117 10845 620� 1% 0.1W3704 4822 117 11534 1k1 1% 0.1W3705 4822 117 11951 2k 1% 0.1W3999 4822 051 10102 1k 2% 0.25W

colour television chassis em3e - reptips.dk em3e.pdf · gb 2 1. em3e technical specifications,...

Documents